Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
528i
535i
550i
528i xDrive
535i xDrive
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/09, 09 09 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 250.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
43 Adjusting
53 Transporting children safely
57 Driving
74 Controls Overview
84 Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
100 Lamps
105 Climate
110 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
124 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
132 Navigation system
133 Destination entry
142 Destination guidance
148 What to do if...
Entertainment
152 On/off and tone
155 Radio
158 Satellite radio
160 CD/DVD player and CD changer
167 Music collection
172 External devices
Communications
178 Telephone
190 Contacts
192 BMW Assist
Mobility
200 Refueling
202 Wheels and tires
211 Under the hood
215 Maintenance
217 Care
221 Replacing components
231 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
238 Technical data
243 Short commands of voice activation
system
250 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be happy to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g., on tech-
nology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet avail-
able at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
These sections contain information on using
the voice activation system.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equip-
ment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisk
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-
nance and repair methods. Therefore, have cor-
responding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Notes
6
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment
such as CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or the
like may cause extensive damage to the vehicle,
compromise its safety, interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system, or affect the validity of
the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW
center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-
800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Can-
ada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region
and from other countries, or contact Transport
Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street,
Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Rear window safety switch 39
2 Sedan: sun blind
*
for rear window 111
3 Opening and closing windows 38
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors 50
Automatic curb monitor
*
51
5 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
51
6
Turn signals 63
High beams,
headlamp flasher 102
High-beam Assistant 102
Roadside parking lamps 102
Check Control 79
Computer 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
7 Buttons on steering wheel
8 Instrument cluster 12
11 Ignition lock 57
12 Horn, entire surface
15 Releasing hood 211
Mobile phone
*
178:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing
*
of
selected phone number and
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice acti-
vation system
*
22
Changing radio station 155
Selecting music track 160
Scrolling in phone book and in lists
with stored phone numbers
Changing entertainment source
Switching recirculated-air mode
on/off 107
HDC
*
86
Lane Departure Warning
*
99
9
Windshield wipers 63
Rain sensor 64
Sports Wagon: rear window
wiper 64
10
Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 57
13
Steering wheel heater
*
52
Steering wheel adjustment
*
52
14
Cruise control
*
65
Active cruise control 66
16
Opening luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 31, 33
17
Head-up Display
*
95
BMW Night Vision
*
96
18
Parking lamps 100
Daytime running lamps
*
101
Low beams 100
Welcome lamps 100
Automatic headlamp control
*
100
Daytime running lamps
*
101
Welcome lamps 100
Adaptive Light Control
*
101
High-beam Assistant
*
102
19
Instrument lighting 104
Fog lamps
*
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Indicator lamps for turn signals
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for
> Active cruise control
*
70
> Lane Departure Warning
*
99
5 Tachometer 74
6 Energy Control 75
7 Display for
> Clock/date 74
> Outside temperature 74
> Indicator and warning lamps 80
> Speed of cruise control
*
66
> Desired speed for active cruise
control
*
70
8 Display for
> Odometer and trip odometer 74
> Computer 75
> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 77
> Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
*
59
> Sport automatic transmission
*
62
> Hill Descent Control HDC
*
86
> High-beam Assistant
*
102
> Check Control message present 79
9 Fuel gauge 75
10 Resetting trip odometer 74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Additional information, e.g. on the cause and
elimination of a malfunction, can be opened via
the Check Control system, refer to page 79.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps signal particular
functions:
High beams/headlamp flasher 102
Fog lamps
*
104
Parking brake applied 59
Parking brake applied for Canadian
models
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 86
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 86
Exhaust-gas values 216
Exhaust-gas values for Canadian
models 216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for hands-free mode for tele-
phone
*
and for voice activation system
*
22
2 Reading lamps 104
3 Initiating an Emergency Request call
*
231
4 Interior lamps 104
5 Glass sunroof
*
, electric 39
Panorama glass roof
*
40
6 Passenger airbag status lamp 94
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Central locking system 30
10 Automatic climate control 105
11 CD/DVD drive 152
12 Programmable memory buttons 20
13 Switching entertainment sound output on/
off and adjusting volume 152
14 Changing
> radio station 155
> track 160
15 Ejecting CD/DVD 152
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Buttons on the controller 17
Selecting menus directly
Temperature setting 106
Automatic air distribution and
volume 106
Cooling function 107
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC
*
107
Maximum cooling
*
107
Air volume 107
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 106
Rear window defroster 106
16
Heated seats
*
49
Active seat ventilation
*
50
Adjusting active backrest
width
*
45
Active seat
*
50
PDC Park Distance Control
*
84
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 86
Opening luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
*
31, 33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu
navigation. The control of the individual func-
tions is described in connection with the rele-
vant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Call up a menu directly, arrow 3
> Move in four directions, arrows 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Press, arrow 6
To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehi-
cle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle
From radio readiness, refer to page 57, the fol-
lowing message is shown on the Control Dis-
play:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
This displays the start menu.
The message is hidden after approx. 10 sec-
onds.
Opening the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g., "Radio", a
new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels
can overlap.
Buttons on the controller Function
MENU Opens the main menu
RADIO Opens the Radio menu
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Opens the Navigation menu
TEL Opens the Telephone menu
BACK Displays the previous panel
OPTION Opens the Options menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opens the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional option: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or set-
tings can be selected that are currently not vis-
ible.<
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
1 Time
2 Display for:
> Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS
*
received
> Phone book
*
loading
> Roaming
*
active
3 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices
> Phone book
*
:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4 Sound output is switched off or
traffic bulletin display
*
:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
inputs via the voice activation system
*
.
Switching the control display
on/off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off display"
Press the controller to switch on.
Split screen
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Selecting the display for the split
screen content
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.
Programmable memory
buttons
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory keys and called up
directly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired button
longer than 2 seconds.
Example for programmable memory
keys
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. ... Press the desired button
longer than 2 seconds.
Executing a function
... Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying button assignment
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
Displaying short info
... Touch the button.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the button longer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
Town/city names can be entered with the spell-
ing used in any of the languages available on the
Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete one letter
or number
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice activation system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, set the language that applies for the
voice activation system in order to enable iden-
tification of the spoken commands. To set the
language of iDrive, refer to page 82.
Symbols in Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
activation system can respond to com-
mands.
2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol is displayed on the Control Dis-
play when you can enter additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then oper-
ate the equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis-
play.
To have the possible commands read aloud:
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the com-
mands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}
{Voice commands}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 243.
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. Switch on entertainment sound output if
necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbrevi-
ated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
Notes
To operate the phone by voice, refer also
to page 185.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphasis and pauses. This also applies
when spelling out and saying a full word
during destination entry.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun-
roof
*
or panorama glass sunroof
*
closed to
prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
3. Select the music track, for instance:
{CD track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Keys/remote control
1 Remote control with integrated key
2 Spare key
3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart-
ment
Remote control with integrated key
Each remote control contains a battery which is
charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a
longer distance with each remote control at
least twice a year to keep the battery charged.
For Comfort Access
*
, the remote control con-
tains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different set-
tings are activated and executed in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 26.
Information on the required for maintenance is
also stored in the remote control, refer to Ser-
vice data in remote control, page 215.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 112
> Sports Wagon: floor panel flap in cargo bay,
refer to page 118
> Driver's door, refer to page 30
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 31.
New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW center.
Spare key
Store the spare key in a safe place such as your
wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.
The spare key and integrated key fit the same
locks.
Adapter for spare key
The adapter is required so that the vehicle can
be started with the spare key or radio readiness
can be switched on.
Remove the adapter from the holder in the
glove compartment and slide the spare key into
the adapter before use.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Per-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
27
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
sonal Profile ensures that most of these set-
tings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.
This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls,
for two with Comfort Access
*
.
Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 28
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
> Displays on Control Display:
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 83
> Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 76
> 12h/24h clock format, refer to page 79
> Date format, refer to page 79
> Language on Control Display, refer to
page 82
> Lighting settings:
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 63
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 100
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 101
> Daytime running lamps
*
, refer to
page 101
> High-beam Assistant
*
, refer to
page 102
> PDC Park Distance Control
*
: optical warn-
ing, refer to page 84
> Head-up Display
*
: selection and brightness
of display, refer to page 96
> BMW Night Vision
*
: display settings, refer
to page 98
> Automatic climate control: AUTO program
and intensity, cooling function, and auto-
matic recirculated air control/recirculated-
air mode, temperature, air distribution, tem-
perature in the upper body region, refer to
text starting on page 106
> Navigation system
*
: voice instructions for
destination guidance, refer to page 143
In addition, the following, most recently
selected settings are recalled during unlocking:
> Programmable memory buttons: selecting
stored functions, refer to page 20
> Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel
*
, refer to page 45
> Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 152
> Radio:
> Display of stored stations, refer to
page 157
> Switching RDS Radio Data System on/
off
*
, refer to page 156
> Phone: volume setting, refer to page 181
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid or tailgate and
rear window
> Fuel filler flap
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using door lock
> With Comfort Access
*
via the door handles
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
In addition, it the remote control is used, the
welcome lamps, the interior lamps and the
courtesy lamps
*
are switched on or off. The
alarm system
is armed/disarmed at the same
time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system
on page 35.
Operating from inside
Via the button for central locking, refer to
page 30. The fuel filler flap is not locked.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
, and
the welcome lamps are switched on.
Setting unlocking behavior
You can set whether the first press of the button
unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehi-
cle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks the
driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
Pressing the button twice unlocks the
entire vehicle.
> "Comfort opening"
5. Press the controller.
Comfort opening
Hold the button down. The windows and the
glass sunroof
*
open.
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
Switching on interior lamps
With vehicle locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages, etc.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan-
ger:
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off alarm: press any button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sedan: opening luggage
compartment lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens, regard-
less of whether it was previously locked or
unlocked.
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure
that adequate clearance is available before
opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A
previously locked luggage compartment lid is
also locked again after closing.<
Sports Wagon: unlocking tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. Make sure that adequate clear-
ance is available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A
previously locked tailgate is also locked again
after closing.
When opening the tailgate, the luggage com-
partment roller cover is raised.<
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehi-
cle is switched on.
Malfunction
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock
using a key.
If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 26.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside, as unlocking from the
inside is not possible without special knowl-
edge.<
When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the luggage compart-
ment lid/tailgate.
Convenient opening and closing
You also have the option of operating the win-
dows and the glass sunroof
*
from the driver's
door lock.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Releasing the
key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from
inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid or tailgate and
rear window with the front doors closed, but
does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel
filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks again
after a short time if no door has been
opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle as soon as you start to drive.
Automatic locking is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<
Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
During opening, the luggage compart-
ment lid/tailgate pivots back and up. Make
sure that adequate clearance is available before
opening.<
Sedan
Opening from inside
Press button 1 or button 2
*
: the luggage com-
partment lid opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid or the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid
opens.
All keys, refer to page 26, fit the luggage-com-
partment lid lock.
Locking separately
Turn a key in the lock of the luggage compart-
ment lid to the right past a resistance point and
remove it in the horizontal position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
This locks the luggage compartment lid and
disconnects it from the central locking system.
If you then hand over the remote control without
the integrated key, refer to page 26, no access
is possible via the luggage compartment lid.
This is an advantage when using valet parking,
for example.
Unlocking again and opening manually
Turn the key toward the left up to the stop: the
luggage compartment lid opens.
If you use the lock to unlock the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm will be triggered. You should
therefore unlock the vehicle ahead of time. If the
alarm is inadvertently triggered: switch off the
alarm, refer to page 35.<
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull
down.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Sports Wagon: opening and closing
rear window
Small items can be loaded and unloaded
quickly when the rear window is opened sepa-
rately.
Press the button: the rear window opens some-
what. It can be swung upward.
Press the window closed to close.
When opening the rear window, the lug-
gage compartment roller cover is
raised.<
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<
Automatic luggage compartment roller
cover*
When opening the rear window, the luggage
compartment roller cover is raised, and when
the rear window is closed, it is lowered.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Make sure that the closing area of the lug-
gage compartment roller cover is clear of
obstructions, otherwise the payload or the lug-
gage compartment roller cover may be dam-
aged.<
Details on the luggage compartment roller
cover are provided on page 117.
Sports Wagon: tailgate
Opening from inside
Press button 1 or button 2
*
: the tailgate opens
unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button on the tailgate or the but-
ton on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
The tailgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.
When opening the tailgate, the luggage
compartment roller cover is raised.
Before closing the tailgate, press down the lug-
gage compartment roller cover until it
engages.<
Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. From the cargo bay, press out the cover 1
on the tailgate with a screwdriver.
2. Press the locking bar 2 in the direction of
the arrow.
3. Open the tailgate and press in the cover
again.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Make sure that the closing path of the tail-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
tailgate make it easier to pull down.
To close the tailgate, merely press it down gen-
tly. The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Sports Wagon: automatic tailgate
operation*
Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the tailgate is to open.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Tailgate"
4. Turn the controller until the desired open-
ing height is selected.
Opening tailgate
The tailgate opens automatically when you:
> Press the button on the outside of the tail-
gate when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Press button 1 or button 2
*
.
> Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
In some country-specific versions, the
tailgate can only be opened using the
remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.
During opening, the tailgate pivots back and up.
Make sure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.<
Automatic luggage compartment roller
cover
When the tailgate or rear window are opened,
the luggage compartment roller cover is raised,
and when the tailgate and rear window are
closed, it is lowered.
Make sure that the closing area of the lug-
gage compartment roller cover is clear of
obstructions, otherwise the payload or the lug-
gage compartment roller cover may be dam-
aged.<
Details on the luggage compartment roller
cover are provided on page 117.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Closing tailgate
Make sure that the closing path of the tail-
gate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<
The tailgate closes automatically when the but-
ton on the inside of the tailgate is pressed.
To interrupt the opening or closing process:
> Press the button on the inside of the tail-
gate.
> Press the button on the outside of the tail-
gate.
Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-
partment lid/tailgate or rear window are
opened
> To movements in the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 36
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage
Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:
> with an acoustic alarm
> by switching on
the hazard warning flashers
> by flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming alarm system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
The luggage compartment lid/tailgate can also
be opened with the system armed with the
button on the remote control, refer to page 31.
When the luggage compartment lid/tailgate is
closed, it is locked and monitored again.
Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 28.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the interior rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood, luggage compartment lid/tail-
gate or rear window
are not properly closed.
Even if you do not close the alerted area, the
system begins to monitor the remaining
areas, and the indicator lamp flashes con-
tinuously after approx. 10 seconds. How-
ever, the interior motion sensor is not acti-
vated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g., in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof
*
must be completely closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g., in the following
situations:
> In two-level garages
> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access*
Comfort Access allows you to access your vehi-
cle without having to hold the remote control in
your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote
control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The
vehicle automatically detects the associated
remote control in the immediate vicinity or in
the interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing
> Opening luggage compartment lid/tailgate
separately
> Sports Wagon: opening rear window sepa-
rately
> Starting engine
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate can only be locked if the vehicle
detects that the remote control you are car-
rying is outside the vehicle.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previ-
ously with the Comfort Access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 26
beforehand.
The special features when using Comfort
Access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sun-
roof, the system is checking whether a remote
control is located in the vehicle. Please repeat
opening or closing if necessary.<
Unlocking
Grasp a door handle fully, refer to arrow 1, but
do not touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3 when
doing so. This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Locking
> On the driver's door, touch the highlighted
surface, arrow 2, with a finger for approx.
1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.
> On the remaining doors, touch the high-
lighted surface, arrow 3, with the back of
your hand for approx. 1 second, but do not
grasp the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of your hand against
the surface, arrow 2 or 3, but do not grasp the
door handle while doing so.
The windows and the glass sunroof
*
are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle stops the closing
process immediately.<
Opening luggage compartment lid/
tailgate separately
Press the button on the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the
button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the
cargo bay is detected in the locked vehi-
cle after closing the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate or the rear window, the lid or rear win-
dow opens again. The hazard warning flashers
flash and a signal
*
sounds.<
Sports Wagon: opening rear window
separately
Press the button on the rear window, refer to
page 32.
Switching on radio readiness
By pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch
on the radio readiness, refer to page 57.
When doing so, do not depress the brake
or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will
start immediately.<
Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
If you take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a
warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display. As long as no
remote control is detected, it is only possible to
restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds
after it is switched off.
Switching off engine with automatic
and sport automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off in trans-
mission position P, refer to page 58.
To switch off the engine in transmission posi-
tion N, the remote control must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
Before driving into a car wash with
automatic and sport automatic
transmission
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction
The Comfort Access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.
When unlocking or locking/comfort closing do
not simultaneously grasp the door handle and
touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3. Otherwise, you
may limit the function.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Replacing battery
If the battery of the remote control is dead, a
message will appear in the Control Display.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con-
trol, refer to page 26.
2. Remove cover.
3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.
4. Press cover closed.
Return used battery to a recycling collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.
For information on using Convenient opening
and closing at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 28 or 30.
For information on comfort closing with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 37.
After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The window closes without the pinch pro-
tection system.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-
trolled closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
Glass sunroof*, electric
The glass sunroof is ready for operation with
the ignition switched on, refer to page 57.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed glass sunroof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Opening, closing
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together for as long as you hold the switch
in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly pressing the switch
stops the motion.
In a similar manner, the glass sunroof closes
when you slide the switch forward. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on using Convenient opening
and closing at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 28 or 30.
For information on comfort closing with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 37.
Opening and closing automatically
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The following movements are also automatic:
> Press the switch with the sunroof open: the
sunroof is raised all the way.
> When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when
closing from roughly the center of the roof
opening or when closing from the raised posi-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
tion, the closing action is interrupted and the
glass sunroof reopens a short way.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass sunroof manually.
1. Fold the cover panel down, if necessary
using a screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 221.
2. Insert the Allen wrench
*
into the opening
provided. Move the glass sunroof in the
desired direction. The arrow below indi-
cates the rotation direction for closing.
Sports Wagon:
Panorama glass sunroof
The panorama glass sunroof is ready for opera-
tion with the ignition switched on, refer to
page 57.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass sunroof and
keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure them-
selves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed sunroof is raised and the sliding
visor opens slightly.
Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised posi-
tion, otherwise the mechanism will be dam-
aged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Opening, closing
Sliding visor
You can move the sliding visor independently
with the sunroof closed or raised.
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The sliding visor opens as long as you keep
the switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The sliding visor will open automatically.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the
motion.
You can close the sliding visor in a similar man-
ner by sliding the switch forwards.
Panorama glass sunroof
With the sliding visor open, proceed as
described under Sliding visor.
For information on using Convenient opening
and closing at the door lock or with the remote
control, refer to page 28 or 30.
For information on comfort closing with Com-
fort Access, refer to page 37.
Opening and closing sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point twice consecutively.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.
Comfort modes
> Press the switch twice with the sunroof
open:
The sunroof is raised.
> When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch twice in the opening direction:
The sunroof is opened all the way.
Comfort position
The sunroof is not completely open in the com-
fort position. This reduces the wind noises in
the interior.
Each time the panorama glass sunroof is com-
pletely opened or closed, it stops in the comfort
position. If desired, continue the motion follow-
ing this with the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor
encounter resistance when closing from
roughly one third of the sunroof opening or
when closing from the raised position, the clos-
ing action is interrupted and the panorama
glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.
The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
1. Fold back the cover, using the screwdriver
from the toolkit at the points indicated if
necessary, refer to page 221.
2. Insert the Allen wrench
*
into the opening
provided. Move the sunroof in the desired
direction. The arrow below indicates the
rotation direction for closing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the sitting position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the fol-
lowing section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 53.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbags are triggered.
Make sure that occupants do not rest their head
on the side or head airbags, otherwise injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju-
ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 93.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 46.
Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Your vehicle is provided with five seats, which
are all equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across
the neck, rub against sharp edges, be routed
over solid or breakable objects or be pinched.
Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Otherwise the belt can slip
over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact
and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing
that prevents the belt from fitting properly and
pull the belt in the upper body area periodically
to readjust the tension, in order to avoid a
reduction in the restraint of the safety belt.
Sports Wagon: if the center safety belt in the
rear is used, the larger backrest half must be
locked, refer to page 117, otherwise the middle
safety belt has no restraining action.<
Safety belts, refer to page 48.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
44
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally pro-
vided by the belt.<
Please follow the instructions on damage to
safety belts provided on page 48 and the infor-
mation on the active front head restraints
on
page 47.
Adjusting seat
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
Adjusting comfort seat*
In this seat, you can also adjust:
1 Backrest width
2 Shoulder support
3 Thigh support
4 Lumbar support
*
Shoulder support
the adjustable upper backrest also supports the
back in the shoulder region. This provides a
relaxed driving position and helps relieve stress
on the shoulder muscles.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press front
or rear section of switch.
> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or
lowers section of switch.
Adjusting active backrest width*
First set a comfortable backrest width, see
above. Based on the backrest width set, the lat-
eral support is automatically adapted to the cur-
rent driving situation.
The adaptation of the backrest width and the
speed of the adjustment vary depending on the
program. You can select from among three pro-
grams from comfort to sport.
Button with three LEDs
Press button once per program:
> "Comfort": one LED
> "Normal": two LEDs
> "Sport": three LEDs
To deactivate: Press button longer.
Button with one LED
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
program is shown on the Control Display. The
LED in the button lights up.
To deactivate: Press button longer.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the backrest width
temporarily opens all the way.
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory*
You can store and request two different posi-
tions for the driver's seat and passenger seat
*
,
exterior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
46
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 57.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.
3. Press the button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The LED goes out.
Requesting
Do not request a position from the mem-
ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a
risk of accident from unexpected movement of
the seat or steering wheel.<
Comfort mode
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.
Requesting with remote control
The last positions of the driver's seat, the exte-
rior rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
You can choose when the position is requested:
> Request when unlocking vehicle
> Request when opening driver's door
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The system cancels the adjustment procedure
when you briefly press one of the seat adjust-
ment switches or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The function for automatically calling up
the last seat position is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching off automatic call-up
Deactivate "Last seat position auto.".
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approximately at ear level. Otherwise
there is increased danger of injury in the event
of an accident. Only remove the head restraints
if no one will be sitting on the seat in question.
Reinstall the head restraints before transport-
ing passengers, as otherwise the head restraint
cannot provide its protective function.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Active front head restraints
In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.
Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Other-
wise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injury-
reducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have
this work carried out by a BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Otherwise, this safety equipment will
not function properly.<
Please contact a BMW center if you wish
to have the front head restraints removed
and installed.<
Front seats: height adjustment
Front seats: adjusting distance to the
back of the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: push the button and slide the head-
rest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<
Comfort seat*
You can adjust the distance to the back of the
head with the shoulder support, refer to
page 44.
Adjusting side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.
Rear seats: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.
Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
48
Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air-
bags complement the safety belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat*
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. A message also appears on
the Control Display. Please check
whether the safety belt is correctly positioned.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.
Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 44.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated into
the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the
left and right. The belt buckle embossed with
the word CENTER is intended exclusively for
use by passengers riding in the center position.
Damage to safety belts
When subjected to strain due to an acci-
dent or in the event of damage, replace
the safety belts, the belt tensioners, and any
child restraint systems and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise cor-
rect operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<
Rear center safety belt
With through-loading system
*
:
Before using the center rear seat, release the
latch plate from the fixture on the rear window
shelf and insert it into the belt lock of the center
safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate
engage in the belt buckle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Heated seats*
Front
The appearance and arrangement of the but-
tons may vary depending on the equipment.
1 Seat heating, three LEDs
2 Seat heating, one LED
3 Seat heating with active seat ventilation
*
Press the respective button once per tempera-
ture level. The temperature level is shown on
the Control Display with buttons 2 and 3. The
maximum temperature is supplied when three
LEDs are lit.
The temperature is reduced and if need be, the
heating is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: Press button longer.
Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Seat heating distribution"
4. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Seat heating distribution"
4. Turn the controller to adjust the distribu-
tion.
The setting is applied.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
50
Rear
Operation similar to front seat heating; two tem-
perature levels, without temperature distribu-
tion.
Active seat ventilation*
The appearance and arrangement of the but-
tons may vary depending on the equipment.
1 Active seat ventilation
2 Active seat ventilation with seat heating
Press the respective button once per ventila-
tion level. The ventilation level appears on the
Control Display. The maximum level is supplied
when three LEDs are lit.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the
ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: Press button longer.
The highest level is used for rapid cooling,
e.g., when the vehicle has become heated
up. After a short time, the system is automati-
cally switched down one level in order to pre-
vent excessive cooling.<
Active seat*
The seat cushion is actively varied by alter-
nately raising and lowering the right and left half
of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular ten-
sion and fatigue to help prevent lower back
pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
The action of the system is reduced and if need
be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up
to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors, otherwise there is an increased acci-
dent risk.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Adjusting
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir-
ror and steering wheel memory on page 45.
Adjusting manually
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their mirror
glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors
in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in
car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir-
rors that have been manually folded in back into
the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in
are folded out automatically at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-
erwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<
Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated whenever the
engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or move selector lever into
position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger's side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when park-
ing, etc.
Deactivating
Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehi-
cles at night, turn the knob.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Adjusting
52
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the inside rearview mirror, one on the front and
one on the back.
For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-
dent as the result of unexpected movement.<
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 45.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is operating,
the LED in the button lights up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g., by opening
the doors.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported in the rear in child restraint sys-
tems which correspond to the age, weight and
height of the child. Otherwise there is an
increased danger of injury in an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are deployed, even with a
child restraint system.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 94.
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions for selection,
installation and use of the child restraint sys-
tems. Otherwise the degree of protection may
be reduced.<
On front passenger seat
After mounting a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig-
gered.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width* on front passenger
seat
Open the backrest width setting of the
front passenger seat all the way. After
mounting the child seat, deactivate the active
backrest width adjustment and do not call up
any memory position. Otherwise this limits the
stability of the child seat on the front passenger
seat.<
1. After unlocking the vehicle, sit on the front
passenger seat and close the door to call up
the memory position.
2. Completely open the backrest width adjust-
ment, refer to page 44.
3. Deactivate active backrest width adjust-
ment, refer to page 45.
4. Install child seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Child seat security
All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the
front passenger can be locked against pulling
out to secure child restraint systems.
Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to retract and pull
taut against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint systems in order not to
impair their protective function.<
Before attaching the LATCH child seat, pull the
belt away from the region of the child restraint
fixing system.
Make sure that the LATCH mounts have
properly clicked into place and that the
child restraint system is resting snugly against
the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action
may be impeded.<
Sedan: rear seats
The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are
located at the positions indicated by arrows in
the gap between the seat and the backrest.
Sedan: rear seats with through-loading
system*
The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated protective caps.
Remove the cover caps before mounting the
child seat.
Sports Wagon: rear seats
The anchor points for the LATCH anchors are
located behind the indicated protective caps
and are covered again after the child seat is
removed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Child restraint system with tether strap
Only use the tether-strap mounting
points to secure child restraint systems,
otherwise the mounting points could be dam-
aged.<
Sedan
There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer
to arrows. Fold the corresponding mounting
point upward before using.
Sports Wagon
Three additional mounting points for child
restraint systems with a tether strap are pro-
vided under covers in the cargo bay floor, refer
to arrows. Remove the corresponding covers
before use.
Placement of tether strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not routed over sharp edges and does
not twist on its way to the upper mounting point;
otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the
child restraint system in the event of an acci-
dent.<
Outer rear seat, Sedan
Outer rear seats, Sports Wagon
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraints
3 Hook of upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Rear window shelf/luggage compartment
floor
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys-
tem
Fold upward or remove covers before using the
mounting points.
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Thread the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint supports.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
56
3. Sports Wagon: thread the retaining strap
between the backrest and the luggage
compartment roller cover. Make sure that
the rear backrest is locked in position.
4. Attach the retaining strap hook to the
mounting point.
5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
6. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Center rear seat
1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.
2. Guide retaining strap through the opening.
3. Fold back the center armrest.
4. Sports Wagon: thread the retaining strap
between the backrest and the luggage
compartment roller cover. Make sure that
the rear backrest is locked in position.
5. Attach the retaining strap hook to the
mounting point.
6. Pull the retaining strap taut.
On journeys
If the vehicle is equipped with rear side
airbags, make sure that children do not
lean out of the child seat towards the door pan-
els. Otherwise injuries can be caused if the side
airbags are triggered.<
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
the door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 39, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Inserting remote control into ignition
lock
Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on.
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation.
Comfort Access*
With Comfort Access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 36.
Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.
Automatic and sport automatic
transmission
The remote control can only be removed when
transmission position P is selected: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.
The engine is started when you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch
if the car has manual transmission or the brake if
the car has automatic transmission.<
Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The time and outside tempera-
ture are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with Comfort Access
*
by touching the sur-
face on the door handle, refer to Locking on
page 37
Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 74.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
58
Radio readiness and ignition switched
off
All indicator and warning lamps in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Starting engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, select the idling position, or shift the trans-
mission into position P and firmly apply the
parking brake, otherwise the vehicle can begin
to roll.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
Manual transmission
Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort
Access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
idling position.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Automatic and sport automatic
transmission*
Remote control in ignition lock or with Comfort
Access in vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Switching off engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
remote control with you.
When parking, firmly apply the parking brake, as
otherwise the vehicle could roll.<
Manual transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle
stopped.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Automatic and sport automatic
transmission*
1. Shift transmission into position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. With Comfort Access: insert the remote
control into the ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Shift into transmission position N.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Switch off the engine.
Transmission position P will be engaged:
> after approx. 30 seconds
> if you remove the remote control from the
ignition lock
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig-
nal also sounds when starting off. The
parking brake is applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to apply the parking
brake while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it
too firmly. In doing so, continuously press the
button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise,
too firm an application of the parking brake can
lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the
car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
While shifting in the 5th/6th gear lane,
press the gearshift lever toward the right,
otherwise accidental shifting into the 3rd or 4th
gear could result in engine damage.<
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
When pressing the gearshift lever to the left,
overcome some resistance.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 61.
Transmission positions
P R N D M/S + –
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
60
Displays in instrument cluster
P R N D DS S1
*
to S6
*
M1 to M6
The transmission position is indicated, and in
the manual mode, the gear currently engaged.
Engaging transmission position
> Do not leave the transmission position P
until the engine is running: interlock.
> With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise the shift command will not be
executed: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<
Engaging N, D, R
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired
direction, beyond a resistance point if neces-
sary. Press button 1 simultaneously out of P or
into R.
The engaged transmission position is also dis-
played on the selector lever.
The selector lever immediately returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging P
Press button P.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
rear wheels are locked.
P is engaged as soon as you switch off the
engine unless N is engaged and with
Comfort Access, the remote control is inserted
in the ignition lock, refer to Before driving into a
car wash, page 58.<
N Neutral
Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car
washes. The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off whenever you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. This function
is useful, for example, in automatic car washes,
refer to page 58.<
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are available.
Kick down
Kick down enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the
increased resistance at full throttle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Press selector lever toward the left from trans-
mission position D:
The sport program is activated, and DS is dis-
played in the instrument cluster; with the sport
automatic transmission
*
also S1 to S6. This
position is recommended for a performance-
oriented driving style.
When the selector lever is pressed forward or
back, the manual mode is activated and the
Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument clus-
ter shows M1 through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are only carried out at a
suitable engine and vehicle speed, e.g., a down-
shift is not carried out at excessively high
engine speeds. The selected gear is briefly dis-
played in the instrument cluster, followed by the
current gear.
To resume automatic mode, press the selector
lever to the right.
Manually unlocking and locking
transmission lock
In case of a power failure, e.g., when the battery
is drained or disconnected, or an electrical fault,
manually release the transmission lock, as oth-
erwise the rear wheels are blocked and the
vehicle cannot be towed.
Only manually release the transmission lock for
towing and firmly apply the parking brake
beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll.
Reengage the transmission lock after parking
the vehicle at its destination.
Unlocking
1. Reach into the trim-piece opening, arrow 1,
and firmly pull the trim piece upward,
arrow 2.
2. Remove cover over the opening, refer to 3.
3. Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 221, into the opening,
arrow 1.
4. Pull the screwdriver toward the rear until it is
heard to engage, arrow 2, and leave it
inserted in the opening. The transmission
lock is released.
Releasing on sport automatic
transmission*
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
62
3. Reach into the trim-piece opening, arrow 1,
and firmly pull the trim piece upward,
arrow 2.
4. Remove cover over the opening, refer to 5.
5. Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool
kit, refer to page 221, into the opening,
arrow 1.
6. Pull the screwdriver toward the rear until it is
heard to engage, arrow 2, and leave it
inserted in the opening. The transmission
lock is released.
Locking
1. Pull out the screwdriver upward.
The transmission lock is locked again.
2. Reinstall the cover and the trim piece.
Information on jump starting and towing from
page 232.
Sport automatic
transmission*
You can also shift manually with two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel.
You can also choose between two driving pro-
grams: Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driv-
ing Control.
Shift paddles on steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly, as both hands can remain on the steer-
ing wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the gearshift system switches into
the manual mode.
> If you do not shift with the shift paddles and
do not accelerate for a certain time, the sys-
tem switches into the automatic mode
again when the selector lever is in D.
> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down: press one of the shift pad-
dles.
Dynamic Driving Control
The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible
for your BMW to react in an even more perfor-
mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:
> The speed range of the engine is optimally
utilized.
> Gearshifts are faster.
> The engine responds more spontaneously
to accelerator pedal movements.
> The steering will operate in an even sportier
mode.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> In the automatic mode, the 6th gear is not
engaged.
Activating system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Deactivating system
> Press the SPORT button again
> Engage reverse gear
> Switch off engine
The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<
Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn
signal flashes three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
64
4 Cleaning windshield, headlamps and
BMW Night Vision camera
*
5 Adjusting rain sensor
sensitivity level
Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermit-
tent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Rain sensor
The wiper operation is controlled automatically
as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sen-
sor is located on the windshield, directly in front
of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the thumbwheel 5.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undes-
ired wiper operation.<
Cleaning windshield, headlamps* and
BMW Night Vision camera*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head-
lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are
also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter-
vals.
Do not use the washing mechanisms if
there is any danger that the fluid will
freeze on the windshield. If you do so, your
vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing,
use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer
fluid. Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise
you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Sports Wagon:
Rear window wiper
1 Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, continuous operation is switched
on automatically
2 Cleaning the rear window
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, other-
wise you will damage the washer pump.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For
this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<
Filler neck for washer fluid
Only add washer fluid with the engine
cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a dan-
ger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is
spilled.<
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser-
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<
Capacity
Sedan:
Approx. 3.2 US quarts/3 liters, with headlamp
washer system
*
approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Sports Wagon: approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
The cruise control is available for use at speeds
of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The
vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you
set using the lever mounted on the steering col-
umn. To maintain the specified speed, the sys-
tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not
sufficient on a downhill grade. Speed can drop
on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi-
cient.
Do not use the cruise control under driv-
ing conditions that do not permit a con-
stant speed, e.g., when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, lose road surface, and
poor visibility. Otherwise you could loose con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident.<
One lever for all functions
1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed
2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
3 Interrupting and deactivating system
4 Resuming stored speed
Maintaining, storing and increasing
speed
Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1:
The speed currently being driven is maintained
and stored. The display 1 in the speedometer,
see below, indicates this regulated speed.
Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's
speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press lever to resistance point for a longer time:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
66
the accelerator pedal. The system maintains
and stores your current speed as soon as you
release the lever.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point:
The speed is increased to the next fives posi-
tion in the mph display or the next tens position
in the km/h display.
Press and hold the lever beyond the resistance
point:
The vehicle accelerates more quickly.
Maintaining speed, storing speed, and
decelerating
Pull the lever, arrow 2:
Functions are the same as 1; the speed is
reduced.
Interrupting system
Press the lever up or down, arrow 3: The
display 1 in the speedometer changes color.
In addition, the system is interrupted:
> when you apply the brakes, even with the
parking brake
> when you shift very slowly, when you shift
the manual transmission into idling mode,
or when you shift the automatic transmis-
sion into the N position
> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated
> when the DSC comes on
Resuming stored speed
Press button 4:
The stored speed is resumed and maintained.
Deactivating system
> Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3
> Switch off the ignition
The speed stored in the memory is deleted.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Active cruise control*
With active cruise control you can select a
desired speed which is then automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways and
is varied to maintain a selected distance setting
to slower moving vehicles ahead.
Active cruise control represents a technological
advance over the familiar cruise control and is a
welcome relief from the constant adjustment of
speed that can accompany driving in traffic on
freeways or other high-speed thoroughfares.
Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges-
tion, the system can reduce fatigue and tension,
while increasing your enjoyment of driving.
Please use it safely and responsibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if
you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active
cruise control will, within limits, adjust your
vehicle's speed automatically so that you can
flow with the traffic without having to make con-
stant adjustments. If, for example, while cruis-
ing at the selected speed, you begin to
approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the
same lane, the system will reduce your vehicle's
speed to the same as that of the vehicle ahead
to maintain your selected distance setting. You
can vary the following distance, which will vary
with speed. Based on your selected distance
setting, the system automatically decreases the
throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if
necessary. In addition, if the vehicle ahead of
you slows to a complete stop, the system can
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
follow this action within the given scope and
can also accelerate from a complete stop if the
vehicle ahead of you drives off again shortly
thereafter. During braking, your vehicle brake
lamps will automatically illuminate to alert a fol-
lowing driver to take action. In addition, it may
be necessary for your vehicle to downshift the
automatic transmission to maintain the dis-
tance setting selected. As soon as the road in
front of you has no moving vehicles, the system
will accelerate to your desired speed. This set
speed is also maintained on downhill grades,
however the vehicle speed can drop below the
set speed when driving uphill if the engine out-
put is not sufficient.
Active cruise control cannot detect stop
signs, red lights, or any object that is
stopped or is blocking the road.
Active cruise control is not and must not be
used as a collision avoidance/warning system.
Since this active cruise control system is a new
technology and operates differently from con-
ventional cruise control systems which you may
be accustomed to, it is necessary that you read
all of the pages relating to this system before
use. Carefully read and observe the information
on the system limitations beginning on page 71
to obtain a good command of the system and its
range of applications.<
Brake pedal feel
When the system brakes and you also depress
the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking
feel results.
Professional* navigation system
If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to
page 132, within limits the system adjusts the
accelerating and braking behavior of the vehicle
to the road you are driving on.
To ensure that the system is informed of
the current course of the road, always use
the latest navigation DVD if possible.<
When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g.
when you leave the map area, this influence of
the navigation system is not available.
Applications
Please try the system first during sparse traffic
and clear road conditions so that you can get
used to the system. After you have experience
and understand the system, only then use it
during normal traffic.
As with conventional cruise control systems,
active cruise control in no way reduces or sub-
stitutes for the driver's own personal experi-
ence, responsibility, alertness and awareness in
adjusting speed, braking or otherwise control-
ling the vehicle. The driver should decide when
to use the system on the basis of road, traffic,
visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise
control is intended for use on highway-type
roadways where traffic is moving relatively
smoothly as well as in slow-moving traffic. Do
not use the system in city driving; in complex
driving situations; heavy traffic such as during
rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery
roads or roads with sharp curves such as high-
way off-ramps; during inclement weather such
as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering
interchanges, service/parking areas or toll
booths. It is also important to regulate your
vehicle's speed and distance setting within
applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take
action or apply the brakes if necessary, espe-
cially when the system is actively following a
vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving condi-
tions can result which lead to a violation of the
law or elevated risk of an accident.
The minimum initial activation speed is 20 mph/
30 km/h, and the maximum speed is 110 mph/
180 km/h. However, you can also activate the
system while stopped, refer to While stopped,
page 69.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
68
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and increasing desired speed
2 Storing and reducing desired speed
3 Interrupting, refer to page 69,
or deactivating system, refer to page 69
4 Activating stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 69, or driving off, refer
to While stopped, page 69
5 Selecting distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 68
Storing current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull it, arrow 2.
The system stores the current vehicle speed. It
is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or
beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis-
played.
The speed then displayed is stored and
achieved on a clear road.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed
increases to the next fives position in the
mph speedometer display or the next tens
position in the km/h speedometer display.
Reducing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
These functions are operated in the same man-
ner as increasing your desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Briefly press rocker switch downward:
Increase distance.
> Briefly press rocker switch upward:
Reduce distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Distance 1, closest
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4, farthest
This distance is set when you acti-
vate the system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance, given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and state driving
recommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, a violation of the law or risk of an
accident could result.<
Interrupting cruise control
Press the lever upward or downward, and with
the vehicle stopped also depress the brake
pedal. The marking in the speedometer
changes color and the distance indicator goes
out.
In addition, the system is automatically inter-
rupted:
> when you apply the vehicle brakes
> when you shift the transmission
> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated
> when DSC comes on
> when you apply the parking brake
> when you release the safety belt and open
the driver's door with the vehicle stopped
> when the system does not recognize any
objects for an extended period of time, e.g.
on infrequently traveled roads without a
shoulder or guard rails, or if the radar sensor
is covered with dirt, refer to page 70
If the system is interrupted, then it is nec-
essary for the driver to actively intervene
by braking and steering. Otherwise, there is a
risk of an accident.<
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press button 4.
The displays appear in the instrument cluster.
While stopped
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, engage position P of the auto-
matic transmission and apply the parking brake.
Otherwise the vehicle can roll.<
If a detected vehicle in front of you brakes to a
complete stop and your vehicle has also been
braked to a complete stop by the system:
> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while
the marking 1 for the desired speed in the
speedometer is green, your vehicle will
accelerate without you having to do any-
thing.
> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while
the marking 1 is orange, you briefly depress
the accelerator pedal or press button 4.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator 3
mean that the vehicle in front of you has
driven off.
If you are stopped behind a vehicle with the
brake pedal depressed and the system is inter-
rupted or deactivated:
1. Press button 4 to activate a stored desired
speed or select a desired speed with the
lever, arrow 1 or arrow 2.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. If the vehicle in front of you drives off, briefly
depress the accelerator pedal or press
button 4.
Deactivating system
> Press the lever upward or downward twice
while driving.
> When stopped, do the same with the brake
pedal depressed.
> Switch off the ignition.
The displays turn off, and the stored desired
speed and distance are deleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
70
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
> Green: the system is active.
> Orange: the system is interrupted.
2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Display also used for warnings, please read
all information on warnings
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-
tem is activated
The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has
driven off
4 Brief display of stored desired speed
If the display --- mph/--- km/h appears
briefly, the conditions necessary for oper-
ation may currently not be met.<
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 continuously
flashes yellow.
The prerequisites for operating the
system are no longer met as a
result of ABS or DSC interven-
tions. The system brakes until you actively take
over.
The indicator 2 flashes red; a sig-
nal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or maneuver the
vehicle yourself. The system can-
not automatically restore the distance to the
vehicle driving ahead.
However, this display cannot relieve the driver
of the responsibility for adjusting the desired
speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.
Radar sensors
1 Long-range sensor
2 Location of the short-range sensors behind
the bumper
3 Location of the short-range sensors behind
the bumper with the M Sport Package
*
Heavy rain and also dirt, snow or ice can limit
the detection of vehicles ahead. If needed,
clean the radar sensor under the front bumper
as well as the bumper area covering the short
range sensors. When doing so, be particularly
careful in removing layers of snow and ice.
Do not apply adhesive labels, etc., in the area of
the short-range sensors.
If the sensor is not aligned properly, e.g. due to
damage, the active cruise control cannot be
activated.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
incorrectly aligned.
A message is displayed if the system fails.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
> ’’NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000
> BV8SRS24
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.<
System limitations
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; in complex driving situations; on
curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads
with sharp curves such as highway off-ramps;
during inclement weather such as snow, strong
rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, ser-
vice/parking areas or toll booths. It is also
important to regulate your vehicle's speed and
distance setting within applicable legal limits.
Always be ready to take action or apply the
brakes if necessary, especially when the sys-
tem is actively following a vehicle in front of
you.<
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system do have physical limita-
tions. For example, the system may not detect
vehicles driving ahead if they suddenly brake
heavily in stop-and-go traffic during accelera-
tion. The system will not apply the brakes or
slow your vehicle when a very slow-moving
vehicle, stopped vehicle or stationary object is
in the lane ahead of you, for example when
approaching a traffic light or parked vehicle or
when a vehicle is stalled in your lane. Also, the
system does not react to oncoming traffic,
pedestrians or other types of potential traffic
such as a rider on horseback. It is also possible
that the system may not detect smaller moving
objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be
especially alert when encountering any of these
situations as the system will neither automati-
cally brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also,
be aware that every decrease in the distance
setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a
vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened
amount of alertness.<
The system cannot allow the vehicle to drive off
automatically in situations that make driving off
considerably more difficult, e.g., on steep uphill
grades, with a heavy trailer or before raised
areas in the road.
Near radio astronomy stations, the system
radar is deactivated at speeds under 20 mph/
30 km/h due to legal regulations.
Be certain to interrupt the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway
offramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving
72
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle that is actually in
the lane next to yours. Always be ready to take
action or apply the brakes if necessary.
In addition, the system is interrupted
whenever the driver applies the vehicle
brakes, shifts the transmission from drive/D to
neutral/N, or deactivates DSC. After any inter-
ruption, the system will no longer automatically
activate the vehicle brakes, which means the
driver must intervene and resume manual brak-
ing. You should then reactivate the system only
when you are fully aware of the prior speed and
distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however, the
driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter-
vene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off, too,
and any settings you have selected are can-
celed.
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle in front of you is behind a stopped
vehicle and unexpectedly changes lanes, you
must react yourself, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle swerves out of adjacent lanes
into your lane, the system does not detect the
vehicle until it is completely in your lane.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to restore the selected distance automatically.
This also applies to great differences in speed
between your vehicle and vehicles ahead, e.g.
when quickly approaching a truck. Once the
system has established that a vehicle is indeed
in front of you, it will indicate that you must
brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself.
Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of
an accident.<
Behavior in curves
If the selected desired speed for a curve is too
high, the system reduces the speed within a
curve. However, it cannot detect curves in
advance. Therefore, select a suitable speed at
the start of a curve.
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control might react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Driver interventions and your
responsibility
Anytime the driver presses down on the
accelerator pedal, any braking action by
the system is interrupted and the distance indi-
cator goes out until the pedal is fully released.
As soon as you fully release the accelerator, the
system will again control your cruising speed
and distance setting. While driving with the sys-
tem activated, resting your foot on the acceler-
ator pedal will cause the system not to brake
even when necessary. Be certain that floormats
or other objects on the vehicle floor do not inter-
fere with movement of the accelerator pedal.<
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply. It
uses only a portion of braking system capacity
and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehi-
cle braking system. Therefore, the system can-
not decrease your speed due to large differ-
ences in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Example: when you approach a
vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than
your own speed such as approaching a toll
booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in
front of you at close range.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
74
Controls Overview
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock,
date
1 Time, outside temperature and date
2 Odometer and trip odometer
3 Press button:
> with ignition switched on, trip odometer
is reset
> with ignition switched off, time, outside
temperature, and odometer are briefly
displayed.
From radio readiness the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.
Date retrieval:
Press CHECK button on turn signal lever, refer
to page 81.
Time and date setting, refer to page 78.
You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the
Control Display, refer to Units of measure on
page 76.
Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive care-
fully, e.g., on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<
Tachometer
Avoid engine speeds in the white-striped
advance warning field, arrow 1, if possible.
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow 2. Never operate the
engine with the needle in the red overspeed
zone of the gauge. At high revs in this range, the
flow of fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 214.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Energy Control
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/
70 liters, including the reserve capacity of
approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
550i: approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters reserve
capacity.
You will find information on refueling on
page 200.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in instrument cluster
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The following information is displayed in the
specified order:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> No information
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
To reset average speed: press BC button on
turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
76
To reset average fuel consumption: press BC
button on turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
For different routes
You can display the average speed and average
consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer
*
.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive.
For operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival, provided that a
destination was entered in the navigation
system
*
, refer to page 133.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the con-
troller again.
Resetting the Trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
All values are reset.
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
Your BMW Service Advisor can deter-
mine your vehicle's current service
requirements by reading out the data stored in
the remote control.<
Additional information
You can view more detailed information by
using the Control Display, for operating princi-
ple refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 79, otherwise the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
78
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Turn the controller until the desired month
is displayed, and then press the controller.
8. Set the year in the same manner.
The date is stored.
To exit the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 215.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date. You can check when
your BMW center was notified.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the
time format below.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting date
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting date format below.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting date format
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal-
function in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
80
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.
means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message
disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 81.
Explanatory text messages
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g., regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To hide the information temporarily:
Move the controller to the left.
To hide the information:
Confirm the information.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the CHECK button on turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are hidden after approx.
20 seconds, but remain stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Press the button longer:
The first stored message is displayed.
2. Press the button:
When the button is pressed again, a differ-
ent message is displayed.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Displays after completion of trip
Malfunction reports generated during the trip
are shown consecutively when you switch off
the ignition.
Before the display disappears, you can display
the messages once again. Press the CHECK
button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes-
sages are present, you can continue to press
the CHECK button to view them in succession.
The display goes out
> after a short time
> when you press the CHECK button again
for approx. 2 seconds
Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls Overview
82
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating limit
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Limit"
3. "Limit warning"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
Settings on Control Display
Language on Control Display
Setting the language
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Warning signal volume
You can raise or lower the volume of the warn-
ing signals, e.g., the "Fasten safety belt"
reminder, relative to the entertainment sound
output. The warning signals have a fixed mini-
mum and maximum volume that cannot be
dropped below or exceeded.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Volume settings"
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol-
ume control
> "PDC": volume of the PDC
*
signal tone
relative to the entertainment sound out-
put
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.,
for the "Fasten safety belt" reminder,
relative to the entertainment sound out-
put
Brightness of Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
84
Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Acoustic signals and an optical display
*
alert
you to the approach of an object from behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.
The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
However, an acoustic warning first sounds for
the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor-
ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center
rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise the physical circumstances would mean
that the system warning was too late.<
Automatic activation
The system starts to operate approx. one sec-
ond after you shift into reverse or move the
selector lever into position R with the engine
running or the ignition switched on.
Wait this short time before driving off.
Manual activation
Press the button, the LED lights up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Automatic deactivation
After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is
switched off and the LED goes out. You can
reactivate the system manually as needed.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, the position is corre-
spondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc. As the distance between
vehicle and object decreases, the intervals
between the tones become shorter. If the dis-
tance to the nearest object falls to below
roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone
sounds.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds:
> if you remain in front of an object that was
only detected by one of the corner sensors
> if you drive parallel to a wall
Malfunction
The LED in the button flashes and a message
appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal-
functioning. Have the system checked.
To prevent this problem, keep the sensors
clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure
that they will continue to operate effectively. Do
not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean-
ing jets for long periods and maintain a distance
of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.
PDC with visual warning*
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already shown there before a
signal tone sounds. The display appears on the
Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
System limits
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with tow bars and trailer cou-
plings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc.
Low objects already displayed, e.g. curbs, can
also disappear from the detection area of the
sensors again before or after a continuous tone
already sounds. Higher, protruding objects,
e.g., ledges, cannot be detected. For this rea-
son, drive with care; otherwise, there is a danger
of personal injury or property damage.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely refer to page 126.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steer-
ing response are improved further.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
produces maximum braking force boosting and
thus helps to achieve the shortest possible
braking distance during full braking maneuvers.
This system exploits all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full brake application.
Adaptive brake assistant*
In conjunction with the active cruise control
with the stop-and-go function, the adaptive
brake assistant ensures that the brake
responds even more quickly during braking
with the brake assistant.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. The system
also identifies unstable driving conditions, such
as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or
sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions in the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional
safety margin with a risky driving style, as other-
wise there is a risk of an accident.<
Deactivating DSC
Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up, but not longer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
86
than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Trac-
tion Control and DSC are deactivated together.
Stabilizing and drive output promoting actions
are no longer executed. In addition, the stability
promoting intervention of the active steering
*
is deactivated, refer to page 92.
A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g., unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or
on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
*
Activating DTC
Press the button briefly; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up.
For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DTC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
xDrive*
xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your
BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv-
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive torque to
the front and rear axle depending on the driving
situation and prevailing road conditions.
HDC Hill Descent Control*
The concept
HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep
terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on
steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to
maintain even better control of your BMW
under these conditions. The vehicle moves at
approximately twice walking speed without
active intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
down steep hills with a speed below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed
automatically down to approximately twice nor-
mal walking speed, approx. 7 mph/12 km/h, and
then keeps this speed constant.
You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary
this automatically controlled speed within a
range extending from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h to
15 mph/25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control
*
.
Activating HDC
Use the button on the steering wheel.
Deactivating HDC
Use the button on the steering wheel; the HDC
display goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
greater than approximately 37 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
Manual transmission:
Use HDC in low gears and reverse gear.
Automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in every drive position.
Displays in instrument cluster
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction in driving-stability control
systems
The warning lamp for the brake system
lights up yellow, together with the indi-
cator lamps for ABS, DSC and Tire
Pressure Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor.
A message appears on the Control Dis-
play. The driving-stability control sys-
tems have failed. While you may con-
tinue, you should remember to proceed
cautiously and drive defensively while
avoiding full brake applications. The
Tire Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor is
also malfunctioning. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The DSC indicator lamp lights up. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. A malfunction has occurred in the
DSC and DTC. The stabilizing actions are no
longer available. The vehicle remains opera-
tional. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
The brake system warning lamp lights
up yellow. A message appears on the
Control Display. The brake assistant is
defective. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
88
1. Hold the vehicle with the brake.
2. Release the brake and begin to drive imme-
diately.
After releasing the brake, begin to drive
immediately; otherwise, the drive-off
assistant no longer holds the vehicle after
approx. 2 seconds and your vehicle will start to
roll backward.<
Dynamic Drive*
The concept
Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti-
mizes vehicle stability during cornering and
evasive maneuvers.
Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on
the front and rear axles. Suspension compli-
ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying
from performance-oriented during cornering to
smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle
is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle
operation, the system continuously runs
through closed-loop control cycles lasting only
fractions of a second.
The system assumes operational status each
time you start the engine.
Sports Wagon: self-leveling
suspension
Malfunction
The warning lamp for self-leveling sus-
pension lights up yellow and a message
is shown on the Control Display. A mal-
function has occurred in the self-leveling sus-
pension. Stop and check the vehicle. If it is con-
siderably lower at the rear than at the front, and
possibly also on one side – rear left compared to
rear right – go to the nearest BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Drive with appropriate caution in the
meantime. The vehicle has reduced ground
clearance and driving comfort may be notice-
ably reduced. Even if the position of the vehicle
is normal, go to the nearest BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ-
ual wheels during driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized when the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
The initialization must be repeated after
every correction of the tire inflation pres-
sure and after every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
When you are driving with the compact wheel
*
the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically. The system is initialized
after this activation phase.
The initialization process adopts the set infla-
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
"Activating…" is displayed on the Control
Display.
6. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving, which
can be interrupted at any time. "Flat Tire Moni-
tor active" is displayed on the Control Display.
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure
loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Identify damaged tire.
If identification is not possible, con-
tact a BMW center.<
3. Replace the damaged wheel, refer to
Changing wheels on page 226.
Run-flat tires*
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid severe braking and steering
maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires, refer to page 208, do not
continue driving. Continuing to drive with a
flat tire could cause severe accidents.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 94 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
50 mph/80 km/h or else you run the risk of
causing an accident. In the event of pressure
loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes
reduced tracking stability in braking, extended
braking distance and altered natural steering
characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
90
tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid-
erably in one or several tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset at the correct tire
inflation pressure.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth-
erwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire
damage caused by external influences.
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g., a flat tire is reported
despite correct tire inflation pressures.
The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, e.g., a compact wheel, or if TPM is
temporarily interfered with by other systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency.
Status display on Control Display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correc-
tion is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.
Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
"TPM" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.
All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio fre-
quency
> Malfunction
Resetting system
Reset the system again after each correc-
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically. Do not
reset the system when driving with a compact
wheel
*
.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the main menu.
2. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Reset TPM"
5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
6. "Reset"
7. "Yes"
Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
8. After a few minutes of driving, the set tire
inflation pressures in the tires are applied as
the set values to be monitored. The system
reset is completed during your drive, and
can be interrupted at any time. When driving
resumes, resetting is continued automati-
cally. On the Control Display, the tires are
shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is
displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis-
play. The message "Tire low!" is shown.<
Notification of low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle care-
fully. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
2. Check whether your vehicle is equipped
with standard tires or run-flat tires.
You will recognize run-flat tires by a
circular symbol containing the letters
RSC on the side of the tire, refer to
page 208.<
Standard tires
1. If all four wheels are shown in yellow, iden-
tify the damaged tire on the vehicle.
2. Replace the damaged wheel or wheels,
refer to Changing wheels on page 226.
In contrast to a compact wheel, a spare wheel is
equipped with the necessary TPM electronics
and also monitored after mounting and after
resetting the system.
Have the tire replaced by a BMW center or a
workshop informed on handling TPM which
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
Run-flat tires*
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid severe braking and steering
maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-
flat tires, refer to page 208, do not
continue driving. Continuing to drive with a
flat tire could cause severe accidents.<
2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
92
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not con-
tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW
center.<
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Dis-
play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction;
have the system checked.
> If a wheel is mounted without TPM elec-
tronics.
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires. As an added safety fea-
ture, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly underin-
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator lights up, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
When you are driving in the low speed range,
e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering
angle increases, i.e., the steering becomes very
direct. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced more and
more. This improves the handling capability of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 85.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up yellow and
a message is shown on the Control Dis-
play. Active steering is malfunctioning
or is temporarily deactivated. At low speeds,
greater steering wheel movements are
required, whereas at higher speeds, the vehicle
reacts more sensitively to steering wheel move-
ments. The stability-promoting intervention
can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously
and drive defensively.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini-
tialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not go out during the cur-
rent trip, have the system checked.
Defect
A text message appears if there is a defect.
Have the system checked.
Brake force display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags
3 Side airbags in front and rear
Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to
remove the airbag restraint system from the
vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the air-
bag system. This category includes the uphol-
stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the
instrument panel, the doors and the roof pillars
along with the sides of the headliner. Do not
attempt to remove or dismantle the steering
wheel. Do not touch the individual components
immediately after the system has been trig-
gered, because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel and has the required explosives
licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to
service the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or undesired airbag triggering,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by eval-
uating the impression on the occupied seat sur-
face of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbags on the front passenger side are
activated or deactivated accordingly by the sys-
tem.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e., deactivated or activated, is
indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, observe the safety infor-
mation and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely refer to page 53.
The front and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side can be deactivated for teenagers and
adults in certain sitting positions; then the indi-
cator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up. In these cases, change the sitting position
so that the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired status cannot be produced by changing
the sitting position, transport the correspond-
ing person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat cov-
ers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other
items onto the front passenger seat unless they
are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not
lay objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a cor-
rect evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<
Operating state of front passenger
airbags
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indica-
tor lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint system intended for the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
purpose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the sys-
tem, especially the child seats required by
the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufac-
tured. After installing a child seat, make sure
that the indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
seat has been detected and the front passenger
airbags are not activated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up if, for
example, the system detects a person of
sufficient size seated correctly on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbags on the
front passenger side are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
From radio readiness, refer to page 57, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag sys-
tem and the safety belt tensioners.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immedi-
ately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
Head-up Display*
The concept
With the Head-up Display important informa-
tion is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g., navigation instructions. This enables you
to take in this information without looking away
from the road.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
1 Navigation instructions
2 Display
> Cruise control
> Active cruise control
> Lane Departure Warning
3 Speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
Selecting displays
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The information appears in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the display is adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of
the instrument lighting.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis-
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain seating positions
> Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions
If the image is distorted, please have the basic
setting checked at a BMW center.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the require-
ments of the Head-up Display to enable a pre-
cise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Care instructions
You can find valuable information on this topic
under Care, starting on page 217.
Only clean the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with
a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may
damage it.<
BMW Night Vision*
The concept
BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system
that is designed to provide enhanced vision for
certain objects at night. This can be especially
helpful for detecting people and larger animals.
When objects are detected, the driver may be
able to take appropriate action sooner. For
example, the driver may identify and detect the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
presence of persons or animals in the road
ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert,
slow down or stop, blow the horn, etc. The
driver can decide which actions are appropriate
and then react accordingly.
A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by
an infrared camera and a generated image is
shown on the Control Display. The resulting
thermal image shows the relative heat radiation
of the objects present in the camera's field of
view. Warmer objects appear brighter and
cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is
dependent on the temperature difference
between the objects and the background and
on the amount of heat radiation of the object
itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per-
son is not continually recognizable as a person
in shape, since the thermal radiation can be
affected by different clothing which blocks heat
loss. Objects with little temperature difference
to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation
are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.
Any improvement in detection depends on
many factors such as the object size and tem-
perature compared to the surroundings, or
other nearby objects, the visual recognition
skills of the driver, weather conditions, and
other factors.
Driving hints
With the system active, periodically but briefly,
glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis-
play to notice objects that could be people or
larger animals. The glance should be similar to
glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at
the image for long periods while driving, as this
will remove attention from the road. If you notice
an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow
down or stop, blow the horn, or take other
appropriate action.
System limits
The system is designed to supplement but not
replace forward vision through the windshield.
The driver is responsible for safe driving at
night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be
used as a continuous viewing window for driv-
ing at night.
No system, no matter how sophisticated, can
operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision
operation is subject to physical and environ-
mental limitations that will reduce the ability of
the system to detect and display a clear thermal
image. Some of the situations in which these
limitations can occur are:
> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight
curves
> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low
> when the camera lens is dirty
> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall
> when displaying very hot objects such as
transformers, car exhausts, etc.
> when the image briefly freezes during nor-
mal system adjustment.
BMW Night Vision's potential benefits
can be limited by the driving style of the
driver, the size and relative temperature of the
detected objects, dirt or contamination on the
camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or
fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will
always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a
speed and in a manner that recognizes potential
hazards and adjust accordingly.
BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace-
ment for the driver's responsibility to adapt to
visibility and traffic conditions. The forward view
illuminated by the headlamps must always be
the basis for making safe driving decisions, oth-
erwise a safety risk will result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Activating BMW Night Vision
1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer
to page 100.
2. With low beams switched on:
> Press the button. Depending on the
vehicle's equipment, the location of the
button may differ somewhat.
> Press one of the programmable buttons
on the steering wheel.
The image will be displayed on the Control Dis-
play after a few seconds. Depending on the last
mode selected, either the normal or full screen
image will be displayed.
Due to the system's need to adjust periodically,
a still image is displayed at certain intervals for
fractions of a second. This is normal and not an
indication of a problem.
To prevent driving without headlamps, at a
speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and
when dark, the thermal image on the Control
Display is only shown when the low beams are
on.
Deactivating BMW Night Vision
> Press the button.
> Press the button on the steering wheel.
> Press the button.
> Via iDrive, refer to Selecting settings.
Selecting settings
For iDrive details, refer to page 16.
1. Activate BMW Night Vision.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
> "Brightness"
> "Contrast"
> "Zoom & Curve mode"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
To exit the menu:
The image automatically disappears after
approx. 5 seconds.
Cleaning camera
The function of the camera may be affected by
heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens.
When this occurs, the displayed image on the
Control Display may become gray.
To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati-
cally heated. However, it may be necessary to
clean the camera lens manually under severe
weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam-
age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive
instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the
lens.
When the windshield is cleaned with the head-
lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically
sprayed as well. Refer to page 64.
Lane Departure Warning*
The concept
This system warns you from a speed of approx.
40 mph/70 km/h when the vehicle is leaving the
lane you are currently in on roads with lane limit
lines. You feel this due to a slight vibration of the
steering wheel.
The system does not warn you if you signal
before leaving the lane.
It is best to use the system on well-developed
roads and freeways.
Switching on/off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
> The two lines 1 indicate that the system is
activated.
> The two arrows 2 mean that the system has
detected one or two lane demarcation lines
from a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h
and warns accordingly.
If you activate the system below a speed of
approx. 40 mph/70 km/h, a message will appear
stating that the system is not active until this
speed is reached.
A warning will be canceled:
> after approx. 3 seconds
> if you return to your lane
> if you brake heavily
> if you signal
System limits
The Lane Departure Warning cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining the course of the road.
If the system issues a warning, do not move the
steering wheel with unnecessary severity, as
otherwise you could lose control of the vehi-
cle.<
The function of the system may be limited in the
following example situations:
> in heavy fog, rain or snowfall
> with worn-away, poorly visible demarcation
lines, or lines that run together or apart or
are unclear, e.g., in road construction areas
> when demarcation lines are covered by
snow, ice, dirt or a great deal of water
> in tight curves or on narrow roads
> when demarcation lines are not white
> when demarcation lines are covered by
objects
> when driving up close behind a vehicle driv-
ing ahead
> with bright oncoming light
> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, vignettes, etc., in the
area of the inside rearview mirror
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Lamps
100
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lights off and daytime running lamps
*
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
*
2 Low beams and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*
, daytime run-
ning lamps
*
, welcome lamps, Adaptive
Light Control* and High-beam Assistant
*
If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off
when the light switch is in position 2 or 3. The
daytime running lamps have already been
switched off at the same time as the ignition.
For this reason, switch on the parking lamps as
needed, switch position 1; otherwise, the vehi-
cle is not lit.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long peri-
ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos-
sible to start the engine. It is preferable to
switch on the roadside parking lamps on one
side, refer to page 102.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
response to changes in ambient light condi-
tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Light
Control* is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on. You can
activate the daytime running lamps, refer to
page 101. In the above-mentioned situations,
the system then switches to the low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps
*
.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock
the vehicle, the parking lamps and interior light-
ing remain illuminated for a brief time.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. "Welcome light"
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time. You can set the
duration or deactivate the function via iDrive.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set or deactivate the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps*
The daytime running lamps light up in
positions 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains
in position 1, the parking lamps light up after the
ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps*
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Light Control*
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to approx. 45 mph/
70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when
negotiating curves, turning lamps are switched
on that light up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch into position 3, refer to page 100.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control directs light towards the front
passenger side when the vehicle is at a stand-
still. When driving in reverse, only the turning
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Lamps
102
lamps are active and illuminate the outer area of
curves.
High beams/
roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<
Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. A sensor on the front side of
the inside rearview mirror controls the process.
The assistant makes sure that the high beams
are switched on whenever traffic conditions
permit. This relieves you of the burden of con-
stantly switching back and forth and simulta-
neously provides you with the best possible vis-
ibility. Naturally, you can intervene at any time to
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 100.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the High-beam
Assistant is activated. The system
automatically switches between high beams
and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic,
vehicles ahead of you, and sufficiently lit areas,
e.g., in built-up zones.
Manually switching between high
beams and low beams
If you wish or the situation requires, you can
intervene at any time.
> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you wish to use the low
beams, just switch on the low beams with
the turn signal lever. This deactivates the
High-beam Assistant.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> If the High-beam Assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you wish to use the high
beams, simply switch on the high beams as
usual. This deactivates the system and it is
up to you to switch back to low beams.
In order to reactivate the system, briefly
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
press the turn signal lever in the high-beam
direction.
> When the low beams are on, use the head-
lamp flasher as usual.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant is designed to
maximize the amount of time that high
beams can be safely used and to quickly switch
back to low beams when traffic approaches.
The system cannot completely replace driver
intervention when unusual conditions are
encountered. For this reason, switch to low
beams when circumstances so dictate. Failure
to do so can pose a safety risk.<
Below are a few examples of situations in which
the system may not react or may only function
to a limited degree, requiring personal interven-
tion:
> in extremely unfavorable weather condi-
tions such as fog or heavy precipitation
> in sensing road users with poor inherent
illumination such as pedestrians, cyclists,
equestrians, horse-drawn vehicles, railroad
or shipping traffic close to the road, and at
deer crossings
> in tight curves, on steep crests or dips, with
cross-traffic, or with partially hidden
oncoming traffic on divided highways
> in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs
> in the low speed range
> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, decals, etc., in the
area of the inside rearview mirror
> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the inside rearview mir-
ror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass
cleaner
Moreover, no system can operate without limi-
tations. High-beam Assistant operation is sub-
ject to conditions that may reduce the system's
ability to recognize the difference between
actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for
example, highly reflective signs, markers, and
streetlights. To be on the safe side, the system
may periodically interpret these situations as
conditions that require low beams. Below are
some of the situations in which premature
switching to low beams can occur:
> approaching large and/or highly reflective
signs
> approaching certain lights, such as drive-
way lighting and porch lights
> approaching certain traffic signals
> approaching large reflective markers
In these situations, the system may interpret
the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir-
ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions
return to normal, the system will reactivate the
high beams.
The High-beam Assistant cannot replace the
driver's responsibility for complying with state
laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to
visibility and traffic conditions.
Switching off via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
High beam assistant is activated and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Lamps
104
Fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The
green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off whenever the
high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on when
you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can control the lighting intensity by using
the thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting, courtesy lamps
*
and the
cargo bay lamps
*
is automatic.
With the courtesy lamps,
LED lights are pro-
vided in the outside rearview mirrors to illumi-
nate the exterior area around the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-
utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 57.<
Switching interior lamps on and off
manually
Press the button.
If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry
lighting and courtesy lamps are to remain
switched off continually, press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are located in the front and rear
adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the button
to switch the lamps on and off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Air directed toward the windshield and side
windows
2 Air for the upper body region, refer to Front
ventilation on page 108
3 Air to footwell
4 Temperature, left side of passenger com-
partment
5 Manual air distribution, driver's side
6 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
7 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat utilization
8 AUTO program
9 Switching cooling function on and off man-
ually
10 Temperature, right side of passenger com-
partment
11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side
12 Maximum cooling
13 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked-
car ventilation system
15 Rear window defroster
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Climate
106
16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display.
Comfortable interior climate
The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis-
tribution and air volume for virtually all condi-
tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
comfortable for you.
The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 27.
AUTO program
The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the tempera-
ture to outside influences throughout the year.
The cooling function is switched on along with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a con-
densation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
The respective current setting is briefly dis-
played on the Control Display when the button
is pressed.
Select the intensity of the AUTO program:
> − Low
> − Medium
> − High
Temperature
Set the desired temperature indi-
vidually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maxi-
mum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
When changing between different tem-
perature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have suffi-
cient time to adjust the set temperature.<
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating output, regardless of the outside tem-
perature.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensa-
tion from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off after a while. Depend-
ing on the vehicle equipment,
upper wires are used as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Air volume, manual
You can adjust the air volume by
turning. You can reactivate the
automatic mode for the air volume
with the AUTO button.
The air volume is reduced to save battery
power. The display stays the same.
Air distribution, manual
You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle
interior via various programs, separately for the
driver's and passenger's side:
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired air distribution of the
respective program is shown on
the Control Display.
Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
This function is only available when the engine
is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensa-
tion on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is also switched on with
the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
At the lowest temperature, the automatic cli-
mate control switches into recirculated-air
mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the
vents for the upper body. Therefore, open these
vents for maximum cooling.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system then recircu-
lates the air currently within the vehicle. During
AUC operation, a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and controls the shut-off auto-
matically.
By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, as the air qual-
ity inside the vehicle deteriorates continu-
ously.<
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g., while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Turn to the right, refer to arrow.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine
> with engine at operating temperature
> with sufficient battery voltage
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Climate
108
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.
Switching automatic climate control
on and off
1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.
2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left
again.
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.
Front ventilation
1 Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
vent outlets
2 Levers to change the vent outlet direction
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
vent outlets, otherwise these could be
catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.<
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance, if the interior
has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and is not directed straight at you.
Adjusting temperature in upper body
region
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Ventilation temperature"
Ventilation in rear
1 Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close
vent outlets
2 Thumbwheel to adjust the temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Levers to change the vent outlet direction
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gas-
eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW
center replaces this combined filter as a stan-
dard part of your scheduled maintenance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior tem-
peratures.
It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from acti-
vating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
The air emerges through the upper body region
vent outlets in the instrument panel. These vent
outlets must be open for the system to operate.
The parked car ventilation is operated via iDrive.
Switching on and off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The parked-car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. Please
reactivated it after this time.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control regis-
ters and stores signals from the original hand-
held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 111.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the orig-
inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
If you have additional questions, please
contact your BMW center or call:
1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 57.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right-hand memory
button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the
LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs
are deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to
12 in/30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the inte-
grated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly for a short time
and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this
indicates that the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. In the case of
an alternating-code system, program the mem-
ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code
hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find informa-
tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
quickly:
All stored programs are deleted.
Individual programs cannot be deleted.
Rememorizing individual programs
1. Hold the original handheld remote control
approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/30 cm away
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the relevant sys-
tem of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the command button of
the original hand-held transmitter. As soon
as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both
buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.
Sun blinds*
Sun blind for rear window
Press the button on the driver's door.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Sun blinds for rear side windows
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Do not open the window with the roller
sun blind deployed. Otherwise, there is a
risk of damage and injury at higher speeds.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle. The light in the glove compart-
ment switches on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Raise the lid into the closed position.
Locking
Lock with a key.
If you only hand over the remote control
without the integrated key, e.g., for valet
parking, refer to page 26, the glove compart-
ment cannot be unlocked.<
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g., music collections.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Front center armrest
The compartment in the center armrest is
divided into two sections.
Opening cover
Press the button. The cover opens somewhat
and can be folded upwards.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper
section contains a compartment with a mat that
can be removed for cleaning, or a telephone
cradle
*
.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Opening upper compartment
Press button and fold cover upward.
Accessing lower compartment
Press the button at the front and fold the upper
compartment or the telephone cradle upward.
Ventilating lower compartment*
Push the slide in the lower compartment
upward.
Depending on the automatic climate con-
trol setting, the temperature inside the
ventilated compartment may be higher than in
the rest of the interior. Should this be the case,
push the slide downward to close off the venti-
lation.<
Adjusting
Push the illustrated section of the center arm-
rest into the desired position.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's speaker system:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 172.
> USB audio interface
*
, refer to page 172.
Storage compartments
Storage compartments are located on the
doors, in the front center console and in the
rear.
Storage nets are located on the backrests of the
front seats, and a net
*
is provided in the front
passenger footwell.
Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets or the net, otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury in an acci-
dent.<
Clothes hooks
Clothes hooks are located near the grab han-
dles in the rear.
When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneu-
vers.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
Cupholders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force containers
that are too large into the cupholders, otherwise
damage could result.<
Opening
Briefly press the button.
Closing
Press the cover in the center and push in the
cup holder.
Ashtray, front*
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Emptying
Press the button, refer to arrow. The ashtray
rises and can be removed.
Cigarette lighter, front*
Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Ashtray, rear*
Emptying
Press the entire cover down. The ashtray rises
and can be removed.
Cigarette lighter, rear*
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Connecting electrical devices
Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.
In front passenger footwell
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
Sedan:
In cargo bay
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
Sports Wagon:
In cargo bay
Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
In rear center console
Depending on the equipment, the sockets in
the rear are covered with caps or equipped with
a lighter. Refer to Cigarette lighter, front,
page 114.
Access to socket:
Remove respective cap or lighter.
Center armrest, rear
Storage tray:
Pull the cover upward, arrow 1.
Access to cupholders:
Press button 2 and open the cover.
Sedan:
Through-loading system*
Opening
1. Release the buckle of the center seat belt in
the rear seat using the latch plate of one of
the other safety belts. Insert the latch plate
at the end of the belt into the socket pro-
vided for it on the rear window shelf.
2. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go, refer to page 47.
3. To release the rear backrest, pull the corre-
sponding lever in the cargo bay.
4. The unlocked rear backrest moves forward
slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the
head restraint.
Closing
1. Fold the rear backrest into the seating posi-
tion and engage.
When you return the seat to its upright
position, make sure that the catch
engages properly. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the vehicle dur-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
ing braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger
the vehicle occupants.<
2. Release the latch plate from the bracket on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
buckle of the center safety belt. Make sure
the latch plate audibly engages.
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo-bay nets
*
or luggage
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 128.
Sports Wagon: cargo bay
Luggage compartment roller cover
Pull out the luggage compartment roller cover
and hook it into the brackets.
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
luggage compartment roller cover. If you
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu-
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
Do not allow the luggage compartment roller
cover to snap back, otherwise it can be dam-
aged.<
Manual luggage compartment roller
cover
When opening the tailgate or rear window, the
luggage compartment roller cover is raised.
Before closing the tailgate and rear window,
press down the luggage compartment roller
cover until it engages.
Automatic luggage compartment roller
cover*
When the tailgate or rear window are opened,
the luggage compartment roller cover is raised,
and when the tailgate and rear window are
closed, it is lowered.
Make sure that the closing area of the lug-
gage compartment roller cover is clear of
obstructions, otherwise the payload or the lug-
gage compartment roller cover may be dam-
aged.<
Expanding cargo bay
The rear backrest is divided. You can fold down
both sides separately in order to expand the
cargo bay.
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure
that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess
when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or eva-
sive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu-
pants.<
To ensure that the safety systems con-
tinue to provide optimized protection,
please observe the safety belt information on
page 43.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
118
Partition net
Do not allow the partition net to snap
back, otherwise there is a risk of injury
and the partition net may be damaged.<
With normal cargo bay
Pull the partition net out of the case by the loop.
Grip the bar on both ends and insert it into the
retaining fixtures, arrow 1. This is best carried
out from the rear seat.
When you no longer require the partition net,
grip both ends of the bar and take it out of the
retaining fixtures, arrow 2. Then slowly allow the
partition net to glide into the case.
With an expanded cargo bay
1. Fold down both rear backrests, refer to
Expanding cargo bay.
2. Use the buttons to unlatch the casing on
both sides, arrow 1.
3. Pull the casing out backwards, arrow 2,
without tilting it.
4. Push the case into the guides on the backs
of the backrests.
5. Carefully pull out the partition net and insert
it in the front brackets as described in With
normal cargo bay. This is best carried out
from the front seat.
To restore the original state, proceed in the
reverse order. Finally, lay the case in the two
side brackets and then press forward until it
engages. The red warning indicator disappears
in the recess when the catch is engaged. Check
whether the case is properly locked in place by
pulling it with a sudden movement.
Compartment in floor
Automatic luggage compartment roller cover:
the opened floor panel strikes against the lug-
gage compartment roller cover in the end posi-
tion. If necessary, unhook the luggage compart-
ment roller cover at the rear before opening the
floor panel.
To open, reach into the recess and swing up the
handle.
The floor panel flap can be locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Controls
119
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The partitions in the compartment can be rear-
ranged.
Folding up spare tire cover
1. Swing up the cover.
2. Detach the hook from the bracket and hook
into the floor panel flap.
Before swinging down, return the hook to its
original position.
Storage area loading options*
Retaining straps
You can unhook the right-hand retaining strap,
e.g., to open the side panel. To unhook at the
rear end, pull downward; to hook in, press it into
the opening. In addition, it can also be secured
in the center. This makes it possible to secure
objects of different sizes.
Hooks
Two hooks can be used to secure smaller
objects.
Press at bottom and fold out until they lock.
Compartments in floor
Front compartment:
To open the flap, pull upward on the handle.
To close the flap, press downward until it locks.
Rear compartment:
To open, reach into the recess and swing up the
handle.
The rear flap can be locked.
Dividing up rear compartment
Fold out the partitions and press down.
Use the partition net, refer to page 118.
Otherwise objects could be thrown
around and endanger occupants, e.g., during
braking or evasive maneuvers.<
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow-
boards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/2.10 m
in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend to con-
tract, reducing its overall capacity.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
120
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo bay opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this also opens the
cover in the cargo bay.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag retaining
strap into the center safety belt buckle that
is marked CENTER.
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger vehicle occu-
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.
Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g.,
for faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.
1. Pull the handle forward and pull the ski bag
up and out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Your BMW center will be glad to provide
you with more detailed information on the
various items of equipment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
124
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle contin-
ues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the follow-
ing section.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at changing engine and driving speeds,
however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick down mode during these
initial miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch is only at its opti-
mized level after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if com-
ponents mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on various factors. Through a few simple steps,
your driving style, and regular maintenance, you
can have a positive influence on your fuel con-
sumption and environmental impact.
Removing unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Removing add-on parts after use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached
to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and
increase the fuel consumption.
Closing windows and glass sunroof
An open glass sunroof or open windows like-
wise increase the drag coefficient and therefore
the fuel consumption.
Checking tire inflation pressures
regularly
Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as
needed at least twice a month and before long
trips.
An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases
the rolling resistance and thus increases the
fuel consumption and tire wear.
Driving off immediately
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed. This is the fastest way for the cold
engine to reach its operating temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Thinking ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
To do so, maintain the appropriate distance
from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory
and smooth driving style reduces fuel con-
sumption.
Avoiding high engine speeds
Use 1st gear only for starting off. Accelerate
rapidly in 2nd gear and above. Avoid high
engine speeds in doing so and shift into the
next gear early.
When you have reached the desired speed,
shift into the highest possible gear and drive
with the lowest possible engine speed while
maintaining a constant vehicle speed.
In general: driving at a low engine speed
reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.
Taking advantage of coasting
When approaching a red light, let off the gas
and allow the vehicle to coast to a stop in the
highest possible gear.
On steep roadways, let off the gas and allow the
vehicle to roll in the appropriate gear.
The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.
Switching off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine at longer stops such as
traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic
jams. Even having the engine switched off for
approx. 4 seconds results in fuel savings.
Switching off functions currently not
required
Functions such as the cooling function of the
automatic climate control, seat heating or rear
window defroster draw large amounts of power
and consume additional fuel. Their influence is
particularly pronounced in city traffic and stop &
go operation. For this reason, it is a good idea to
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Having maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to
achieve the optimum economy and service life
of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the
maintenance performed by a BMW center. Also
please pay attention to the BMW maintenance
system, refer to page 215.
General driving notes
Closing luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid/tailgate is com-
pletely closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could
enter the interior of the vehicle.<
If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lug-
gage compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof or
panorama glass sunroof.
2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli-
mate control to a high level, refer to
page 107.
Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temper-
atures are generated on the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail
pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
126
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, refer also to Mini-
mum tire tread on page 208.
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the road if it
is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at
walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Using parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle in
place for a long time by riding the clutch;
use the parking brake. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos-
sibly even brake failure.<
The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting, if necessary all the
way down into first gear. This strategy helps
you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake
system. For information on downshifting in the
manual mode of the automatic transmission,
refer to page 61.
Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in
idle or with the engine switched off, other-
wise there will be no engine braking action or
support of the braking force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the air conditioner sys-
tem during operation, and then exits under the
vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow out.<
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-
aged.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle
may be damaged and unstable driving con-
ditions may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
rear backrest.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
128
> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
> Sports Wagon:
Use the partition net to protect the occu-
pants, refer to page 118. Make sure that
objects cannot penetrate through the parti-
tion net.
Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects
which could strike the rear window while
driving.
Securing cargo
> Use the luggage net
*
, luggage straps, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes
mounted in the cargo bay are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustration.
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud-
den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces-
sary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 241, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak-
ing or evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
with the upper attachment points for LATCH,
refer to page 55; otherwise, you could damage
them.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precau-
tions included with the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the door
openings or on the roof rails
*
.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 241.
Distribute the roof load uniformly. The load
must not be too large in area. Always stow the
heaviest pieces on the bottom. Be sure that
adequate clearance is maintained for raising the
glass sunroof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the luggage compart-
ment lid/tailgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how to enter
destinations and specify your route so that the
navigation system can guide you reliably to your
destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation system
132
Navigation system
General information
With the help of satellites, the navigation sys-
tem is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any desti-
nation you enter.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Failure to take to this precaution
can place you in violation of the law and put
vehicle occupants and other road users in dan-
ger.<
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center.
Depending on the data volume, a data update
may take several hours.
> The data are updated while you are driving.
> The update is resumed automatically when
a trip is continued after an interruption.
> All functions are available during the trip.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is com-
pleted.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting the navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Removing the navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Displaying information on the version
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information is displayed on the data version.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 135
> Last destinations, refer to page 136
> Special destinations, refer to page 136
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 138
> Selecting home address, refer to page 136
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 139
> Destination entry via BMW Assist*, refer to
page 137
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. If you do not observe this precau-
tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants
and other road users.<
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 141. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town/
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
To delete letters:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is
displayed.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case all streets of the entered
country are offered for selection. The related
town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered des-
tination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the country currently dis-
played.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
9. Select the street.
Entering house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
> Set your "Route preference",
refer to page 142.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.",
refer to page 136.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 190.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts are displayed with addresses if
these have been checked as destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page 191.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces-
sary, using "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using home address as destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 190.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g., a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to this location.
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. "Search area"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.,
hotels or restaurants.
Category details
For some special destinations, additional
details can be displayed that are available in the
navigation data, e.g., Italian-style restaurant.
"Category details"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
> "At current location"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the current loca-
tion and are displayed with a directional
arrow pointing to the destination.
> "At destination", "At a different destina-
tion", "Along route"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the location where
the search is being performed.
> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym-
bols. The view depends on the map
scale and the category.
3. Highlight a special destination: The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the BMW Con-
cierge service, refer to page 193.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max-
imum of 100 entries.
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight a special destination: The desti-
nation is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination via
the map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol. The interactive map is
started.
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another dest.".
> "Return": return to the map view.
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started.
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis-
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi-
nates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
> Select a symbol and "Start guid-
ance", if necessary.
> "Exit interactive map"
> Map view
> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 136.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
General information
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice activation system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti-
vate the voice command function for this pur-
pose if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Voice commands}.<
Saying the entries
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the system language, refer to
page 82.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> The town/city, street and house number
can be said as a single sentence.
*
> Spell the entry if the language region and
the system language differ.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag-
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
Entering an address*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the town or city, street and house num-
ber in a single sentence.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
6. If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g., the town/
city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as a
complete word
*
.
The methods of entry depend on the nav-
igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit-
ies may be suggested.
2. {Enter address}
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
4. Select town/city:
> Select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> Select other town/city: {New entry}
> Select an entry, e.g., {Entry 2}
> Spell an entry: {Spell city}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination entry
140
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/
city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from this list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
Entering house number
You can enter house numbers up to 999:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Adding further intermediate
destinations
Further intermediate destinations can be
added.
Saving destination
The destination is automatically added to the
list of last destinations.
Planning a trip
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
Entering further intermediate
destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered:
"Start guidance"
Storing a trip
Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
{Start guidance}
{Add as another destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK"
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Starting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing trips
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations can be displayed in
reverse order after destination guidance is
started.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Rearranging the intermediate
destinations
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip dest."
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
Deleting an intermediate destination
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip dest."
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Word-matching principle
The system supports the word matching princi-
ple to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing
checks, comparing your destination entries
with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis
for instant response. The user benefits include:
> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another coun-
try.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
142
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the des-
tination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.,
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route,
which is a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads
> "Efficient route": optimized combination
of the fastest and shortest roads
> "Short route": short distance, irrespec-
tive of how fast or slow progress will be
> "Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes while destination
guidance is active
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> Avoid highways where possible:
"Avoid highways"
> Avoid toll roads where possible:
"Avoid toll roads"
> Avoid ferries where possible:
"Avoid ferries"
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 144
> Arrow view in the Head-up Display
*
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis-
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle-
tins are displayed for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num-
ber of miles.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta-
tions along the route are recommended.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of gas stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Destination guidance via
voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 20.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting the volume of voice
instructions*
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces-
sary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map display
Displaying map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map view:
Information in the map view:
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
To show/hide information on the map:
Press the controller.
Viewing the map
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select a setting:
> "View facing north"
> "View in dir. of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "Arrow display"
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions are
switched on
Voice instructions are
switched off
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping destina-
tion guidance
Switching voice instructions
on/off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Press the controller.
Changing the map section
Select the interactive map.
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
3. Set the optimized map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions. When
the traffic bulletin map is activated, this
setting is disregarded.
> "Satellite images"
Satellite images
*
are displayed depend-
ing on availability and resolution.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas
that are contained in the navigation data
are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic Info map"
The map is optimized for displaying traf-
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special
destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for the split screen display
The map view for the split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is switched on.
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Exit ramp view"
Changing scale
1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. turn the controller.
Traffic information*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes-
sage Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually via iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map view.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con-
ditions contained herein.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Destination guidance
146
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
management centers and the traffic information
is periodically updated.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to your planned route is auto-
matically displayed. Whether destination guid-
ance is active or not, you can have the traffic
bulletins displayed in the map view or in the traf-
fic info list.
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map view.
Opening the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol: "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
5. Select a traffic bulletin.
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
3. Exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic bulletins on the map
When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the
Control Display changes to a black and white
display. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in
this setting. The symbols for the special desti-
nations are no longer displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic Info map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc-
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route.
Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa-
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected,
refer to page 143.
During destination guidance, traffic obstruc-
tions on the route are taken into consideration.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance"
is not selected, you will be shown certain infor-
mation, such as the length of the traffic conges-
tion, when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Selecting a detour
Select the symbol: "Detour".
"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current
destination guidance.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the
route will be changed automatically in the event
of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on the road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly cal-
culated route may lead through the traffic
obstruction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
What to do if...
148
What to do if...
What to do if…
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is best when you have an unob-
structed view to the sky.
> The destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in black and
white?
When the traffic bulletin map is activated,
the Control Display changes to a black and
white display. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
152
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD/DVD player
> CD changer
*
> Video
*
> External devices, e.g., MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel; refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
> Voice activation system
Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD
player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off
When the system is switched on, the
most recently selected radio station or
track is played.
> Turn: adjusting volume
2 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player,
CD changer and certain multimedia
devices
3 Eject the CD/DVD
4 CD/DVD drive
*
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
Sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition is switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this pur-
pose.
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is set.
You can also adjust the volume with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g., treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote key cur-
rently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
153
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback, Surround*
You can select between stereo and multi-chan-
nel playback, Surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "L7 Surround"
Multi-channel playback, Surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
vated, depending on the audio track selected.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Volume
> "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume
control
> "PDC"
*
: volume of the PDC signal tone rel-
ative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g., for
the "Fasten safety belt" reminder, relative
to the entertainment sound output
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
On/off and tone
154
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
settings.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
*
> Weather Band
*
> Satellite radio
*
Selecting a station
Press the knob if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn and press the controller
or
Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 11.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection using the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Radio
156
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
About programmable memory buttons
You can also store a station on the programma-
ble memory buttons, refer to page 20.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis-
rupted, it can take some time before the station
names are displayed.
Switching RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi-
tal signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with better sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For-
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Due to
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe-
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro-
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 20.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Weather Band*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce-
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather news
flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to
3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most
stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a
storm, the National Weather Service interrupts
the routine weather news and transmits special
warning messages instead. If you have a ques-
tion about NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact the nearest office of the National Weather
Service. Details are also provided on the Inter-
net at www.nws.noaa.gov.
Calling up weather news flashes
To operate via the iDrive:
1. Switch on the radio.
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Satellite radio
158
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have this package enabled.
With this new technology the signal may
fail, causing interruptions in reception.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
Enabling channels
1. Ensure that reception is reliable. Reception
is usually best when you have an unob-
structed view to the sky.
2. "Radio"
3. "Satellite radio"
4. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
5. Select the channel.
If the channel has not yet been enabled, then a
phone number and the ESN electronic serial
number are displayed.
6. Call the phone number to have the channel
enabled.
The channels can be disabled again via this
phone number.
Disabling channels
The channels can be disabled by phone. To do
so, have the electronic serial number ESN
ready.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio".
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Open "Options".
5. The electronic serial number is displayed.
6. Call Sirius to have the channel disabled.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a channel
Selecting a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select desired channel.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "All Channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Store Channel"
6. Call up the desired memory location.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed once again
after a short time.
Displaying information about another
channel
Information can be displayed about a channel
that is not being played.
1. Highlight the channel about which you wish
to display information.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Channel info"
Changing the channel using the button
next to the CD/DVD drive
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The system changes to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
If no signal can be received for more than 4 sec-
onds, a message is displayed on the Control
Display.
Reception may not be possible for certain
reasons, e.g., environmental influences or
topographical conditions. The satellite radio
has no influence on this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings,
near trees, mountains or other sources of radio
interference.
Reception is usually possible again as soon as
the signal is available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
160
CD/DVD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
printed side up. The CD/DVD is drawn in auto-
matically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer
*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Start playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 164.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Ejecting the CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting a track using the button
Press the button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
*
Symbol Function
CD/DVD player
CD changer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CD/DVD with compressed audio files*
Depending on the data, some letters and num-
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
5. Select the track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
162
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off if the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic repeat*
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Start playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some
national-market versions only with the parking
brake applied.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South Amer-
ica, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0All regions
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
The Video menu is displayed:
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
*
Start playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
Reverse
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
164
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD changer*
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove compartment.
Removing CD magazine
To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or
remove them from it, you must first remove the
magazine from the CD changer:
Press button 2: the CD magazine 1 slides out.
Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the
magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be
read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs into/from the
CD magazine
When inserting or removing CDs, remember to
hold them by their edges, taking care to avoid
touching the data side with its reflective CD
memory surface.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD into each compartment of the
magazine with the labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.
Inserting CD magazine
Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in
the direction of the arrow.
The CD changer reads in the loaded CDs and is
then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g., Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter may jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD may jam and no longer
eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent data-cre-
ation or recording processes, or poor quality or
old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and mois-
ture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
166
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro-
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -
may only be used for private purposes. Copying
of this technology is prohibited.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Storing music
Music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection in the vehi-
cle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC
formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disc.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan-
dard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software copyright 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc., for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo, the
logo typeface and the "powered by Gracenote"
logo are trade marks of Gracenote.
Storing from CDs/DVDs
Data can only be stored from CDs/DVDs on the
CD/DVD player.
1. Insert the CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence out of the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player as this will interrupt the storage process.
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD that have already
been stored can also be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Music collection
168
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove com-
partment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard discs, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Data can only be stored from a USB
device via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Music, playing
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice*
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 22.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To select a track directly:
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one sentence.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g.,
{Select artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
{Title …}
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Music collection
170
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later if
needed.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a directory and track
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played back.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played back.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing music from the USB device,
the existing music collection in the vehi-
cle is replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
External devices
172
External devices
AUX-IN port
You can connect an external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi-
cle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via
iDrive.
Connecting
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Via iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
USB audio interface*
It is possible to connect external audio devices/
mobile phones. They can be operated on the
iDrive. The sound is played back on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 players,
USB flash drives or mobile phones that are sup-
ported by the USB audio interface.
Due to the large number of different audio
devices/mobile phones available on the market,
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile
phones at your BMW center.
Audio files
The system can play back common audio files,
e.g., MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, as well
as playback lists in the M3U format.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Connecting via the USB audio interface
Lift up the center armrest.
Apple iPod/iPhone
To connect the device, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
from your BMW center. The cable adapter is
required for a flawless connection.
USB device
To connect the device, use a flexible
adapter cable to protect the USB inter-
face and your USB device against physical
damage.<
Connect the USB device to the USB audio
interface.
After connecting for the first time, the informa-
tion of all tracks (e.g., artist, music genre) and
the playback lists of the USB device are trans-
ferred to the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000
tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
The playback starts with the first track.
Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name
Track search
You can call up the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up the tracks via the file directory.
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
> Information: type of music, artist, album,
track
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting a track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
External devices
174
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-
ist".
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" can be used to find specific entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed. Not all catego-
ries need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, call
up that artist only. All of the tracks by that
artist are then displayed.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
To open playback lists:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
You can play back the tracks of the selected list
in random order, e.g., all tracks of an artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.,
extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of the audio device. Other-
wise, the audio device can be damaged and the
resulting distraction can reduce road safety
while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.
Connecting instructions
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a current of max. 500 mA if this is sup-
ported by the device. Therefore, do not
connect the device to the power socket in
the vehicle.
> Do not force the plug into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard discs.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice commands
and how to use BMW Assist or TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
178
Telephone
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the
buttons on the steering wheel or using voice
commands
*
.
A mobile phone that has been paired once is
automatically detected again with the engine
running or the ignition switched on as soon as
it is in the vehicle interior. The logon data of up
to four mobile phones can be stored simulta-
neously. If several mobile phones are detected
simultaneously, the respective last mobile
phone paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the exter-
nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen-
ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are
offered for.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when traffic conditions
allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile
phone in your hand while you are driving; use
the hands-free system instead. If you do not
observe this precaution, your being distracted
can endanger vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Ask your BMW center which mobile phones
with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the
mobile phone preparation package or which
mobile phones snap-in adapters are available
for. These mobile phones support the functions
described in this Owner's Manual with a certain
software version. Malfunctions can occur with
other mobile phones.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
using:
> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands
*
, refer to page 185
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: The mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. Information on this
subject is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle, refer to
page 180, and on the mobile phone.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
179
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
> Depending on the mobile phone, certain
settings may be necessary on the mobile
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated
> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for exam-
ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> For pairing, define a 4- to 16-digit number
of your choice as the Bluetooth Passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers better protection against unautho-
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required following successful pair-
ing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi-
cle stopped, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<
Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/
Stop button without depressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth"
5. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation with mobile phone
6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone and differ depending
on the model, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of your mobile phone, e.g., find, con-
nect or pair under Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey you specified.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.
If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within 2 minutes if the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
> As soon as a mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the phone book entries stored
on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are
transmitted to your vehicle. This transmis-
sion is dependent on your mobile phone,
refer to the operating instructions of the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
180
mobile phone if necessary, and can take
several minutes.
> Four mobile phones can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
Checking if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Infor-
mation on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then
repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.
> Repeat the pairing procedure.
> If all items on the list have been checked
and the mobile phone still cannot be paired,
please contact Customer Relations.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue-
tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g., a laptop com-
puter.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
181
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g., from
the list of received calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g., after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev-
eral minutes.
Speech quality
If the person you are talking to cannot under-
stand you well, this may be due to excessively
loud background noises. The full preparation
package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noises, e.g., by closing
the windows, reducing the air volume of the
automatic climate control or pointing the
opened front vent outlets downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem.
Requirements
> The logon data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi-
cle.
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
182
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select this symbol to establish the con-
nection
or
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The phone number can also be entered using
voice commands
*
, refer to page 185.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Calls with multiple parties
You can switch between calls and connect two
calls to a single conference call. These func-
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this hand-
set.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.
Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts
*
and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a des-
tination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
184
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store in vehicle"
Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis-
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Dialing a number
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"
Messages
Different types of messages can be displayed:
> My Info messages from the BMW Assist
portal
> Messages from BMW Concierge
Displaying messages
1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
My Info
To start destination guidance:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
Dial the number in the message:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired number.
2. "Call"
Messages from the Concierge service
To use the address in destination guidance
*
:
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
To dial a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
To store the address:
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message"
Switching between the
mobile phone and hands-free
system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue calls begun outside the Blue-
tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free
system when the motor is running or the igni-
tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile
phone, the system automatically changes over
to the hands-free mode.
For mobile phones that do not automatically
change over to the hands-free mode:
Depending on the mobile phone model used,
the conversation can be continued via the
hands-free system if necessary. Act according
to what is shown on the mobile phone display,
refer to the operating instructions of your
mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the hands-free system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of your mobile phone.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link, refer to page 180.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications net-
work can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.
Operation by voice*
The concept
> You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the
steering wheel.
> Most menu items on the Control Display
can be voiced as commands. The voice
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
186
activation system supports you by making
announcements and asking questions.
> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Requirements
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 181.
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g., a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, for instance:
Example: Dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting volume of instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the knob during instructions.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
You say The voice commands answers
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
For instance, {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue ?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
Voice phone book
Operating by voice command requires a per-
sonal voice phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, it is not possible to
use voice command either to call phone num-
bers stored in the mobile phone or to store new
numbers. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An
entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Creating and editing a voice phone
book
To store an entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
Listen to the entries and select:
You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
{Redial}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
requested to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Telephone
188
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection. Use the SOS but-
ton
*
instead, refer to page 231.
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha-
sis and speed.
> Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof
*
/
panorama glass sunroof
*
closed to prevent
interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Inserting/removing the snap-
in adapter*
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged from
radio readiness or with the steering unlocked.
To conserve vehicle battery power, avoid
using the mobile phone when the ignition
is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Contacts
190
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
from the mobile phone
*
are displayed as well if
this function is supported by the mobile phone.
The addresses can be used as destinations for
navigation and the phone numbers can be
dialed.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-
gation system, it is only possible to
enter addresses that are contained in the
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.<
6. If applicable, "Store"
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as the home
address
A contact can be stored as the home address. It
is placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. Create a new contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as home address"
If the home address is deleted, only the content
of the home address entry is deleted and not
the entry itself.
My contacts
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone
*
.
Displaying contacts
"My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Displaying the detailed view*
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
Selecting a contact as the navigation
destination
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone
*
may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con-
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be corrected to match
to the navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the con-
tact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number*
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone
*
is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi-
cle, and only this copy is displayed.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
*
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
192
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request
*
is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys-
tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser-
vice will be available. The BMW Assist system
can be reactivated by a BMW center after sign-
ing a new contract.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Activation
must be completed.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Offered services
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection is established to
the BMW Assist Response Center. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic collision notification: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance
*
can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
time.
> BMW Customer Relations: connection with
Customer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW center, either automati-
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote door unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen vehicle recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
> In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
and information for route planning, traffic
and weather. A limited number of calls can
be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling, such as when
the mobile phone is not available or dis-
charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
TeleService*
TeleService supports communication with your
BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance
*
.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection costs may ensue.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> The engine is running.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, for example, res-
taurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas
stations or hotels, as well as receive the corre-
sponding telephone numbers and addresses.
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance
*
.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge.
You are connected to the BMW Concierge ser-
vice to obtain the required information. You can
then have the phone number and address sent
to you and, for example, use it for destination
guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels
can be booked directly through the BMW Assist
Concierge service. When an information mes-
sage is received, a list of the received messages
is displayed automatically. Open the message
via the message list, refer to page 184.
Roadside Assistance
You can call Roadside Assistance
*
of the
BMW Group should you require help in the
event of a breakdown.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone
*
is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
194
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by
Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagno-
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
Activating BMW Assist*
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
BMW Search is an online portal that makes cer-
tain services available for use in your vehicle,
e.g., information on restaurants along your
route.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser soft-
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront
is a trademark or registered trademark of
ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun-
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless net-
work coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Using BMW Search
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If the vehicle is equipped with the
mobile phone preparation package, a voice
connection is established.
Service Request*
At a glance
You can send a request to your BMW center to
arrange a service appointment. The TeleSer-
vice data is transmitted during a Service
Request. If possible, your BMW center will
establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
BMW Assist
196
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
You can check when the BMW center was noti-
fied.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
This function can be called up via "Options".
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open any menu.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Service status"
5. "Available services"
BMW Assist, activating
If the services included in a BMW Assist sub-
scription are not displayed, they may need to be
activated.
"Activate BMW Assist"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics, including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
breakdown assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Refueling
200
Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling;
otherwise no fuel can be filled into the
tank and a message is displayed.<
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and
regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con-
tainers in the vehicle. These could become
leaky and cause an explosion or a fire in an acci-
dent.<
Fuel filler flap
To open and close: press the rear edge of the
fuel filler flap.
Manual release
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler flap manually.
Sedan
1. In the cargo bay, raise the floor mat and the
cover located beneath it.
2. Open the snap fasteners of the right side
panel and take off the side panel.
3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Sports Wagon
1. Unhook the retaining strap
*
, refer to
page 119.
2. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
3. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
or property damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
201
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling; otherwise this leads to
> premature pump shutoff
> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
550i: approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters reserve
capacity.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel filler cap
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message
*
is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.
Fuel specifications
Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
permanent damage to the catalytic con-
verter will result.
Do not use E85, i.e., fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys-
tem will result.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-
age can result.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
202
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving com-
fort and most importantly, driving safety.
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire
*
: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. Otherwise driving instability
or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can
result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.
Do not drive with depressurized, i.e., flat tires,
except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously
impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can
lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 89, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 90.<
Pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow-
ing:
> Tire sizes of your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. 100 mph/
160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.
The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire dam-
age and accidents may result.<
Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages. Oth-
erwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
203
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
528i
535i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
225/50 R 17 94 V M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
245/40 R 18 93 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 36/250 44/300
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL 32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 38/260 45/310
Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35R1895W
32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 36/250 42/290
Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 275/30R1996YXL
32/220 38/260 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
225/55 R 16 95 H M+S
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
225/50 R 17 94 M+S W
225/50 R 17 94 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 38/260 45/310
245/40 R 18 93 W 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 38/260 45/310
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
204
528i xDrive
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL 32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 W
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 38/260 42/290
Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 19 96 Y XL
33/230 39/270 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
225/50 R 17 94 V M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
245/40 R 18 93 W
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL
32/220 36/250 32/220 36/250 38/260 45/310
Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 W
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 38/260 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
205
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
535i xDrive
535i xDrive Touring
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 35/240 42/290
225/50 R 17 94 W M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
32/220 36/250 32/220 36/250 38/260 45/310
245/40 R 18 93 W 33/230 36/250 33/230 36/250 38/260 45/310
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL 35/240 38/260 35/240 38/260 38/260 45/310
Front: 245/40 R 18 93 W
Rear: 275/35R1895W
32/230 35/240 33/230 33/230 38/260 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 W M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
245/45 R 17 95 W
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
33/230 41/280 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
245/40 R 18 93 Y 32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL 36/250 44/300 36/250 44/300 41/280 48/330
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
206
550i
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed letter
Q= up to 100 mph/160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Compact wheel
*
:
T 135/80 R 17 102 M
61/420
Traveling speeds up
to max. of 100 mph/
160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceed-
ing 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in psi/
kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
245/40 R 18 93 Y 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280
245/45 R 17 95 W
245/45 R 17 99 V M+S XL
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S
225/50 R 17 94 W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 38/260 45/310
245/40 R 18 97 V M+S XL 33/230 39/270 33/230 39/270 39/270 46/320
Front: 245/40 R 18 93 Y
Rear: 275/35 R 18 95 Y
32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 33/230 38/260
Front: 245/35 R 19 93 Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 19 96 Y XL
35/240 39/270 33/230 38/260 38/260 45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 241.
For instance
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
(not on ZR tires)
Speed code letter (in
front of the R on ZR tires)
225/50 R
17
94 W
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1009 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2009.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 208.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
For instance
Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1009
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer
to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum-
ference and are marked on the side of the tire
with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread
has been driven down to the wear indicators, a
tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been
reached.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazards and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire
damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
Run-flat tires*
You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained
tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforce-
ment ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire, page 89
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Notifi-
cation of low tire inflation pressure, page 91
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include the
possibly different tire casing structures and the
often wide variations in their age, which can
result in a limited service life.<
The right wheels and tires
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would other-
wise be impaired, e.g., ABS, DSC or xDrive.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread config-
uration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.
Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or converting from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 90. Your BMW center will be
happy to advise you on this subject.
Recommended tire brands
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.
Run-flat tires
When mounting new tires, or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety. In addition, no spare
tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW
center will be glad to advise you.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Paying attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissi-
ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in acci-
dents.<
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
Rotating wheels between axles
BMW does not recommend moving the front
wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise
the handling characteristics may be impaired.
With tires of different makes and types
*
such a
change is not permissible.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Consult your BMW center for more infor-
mation.
Use is only permissible in pairs on the rear
wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not ini-
tialize the Flat Tire Monitor, otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
When driving with snow chains, it may be prac-
tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 85.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Under the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training.
If you do not know what repair procedures to
follow, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If this work is
not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull lever.
Opening
Press the release handle and open the hood. Do
not open the hood until the engine has cooled
down.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx.
16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly
heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not com-
pletely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
212
Engine compartment
1 Filler spout for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
2 Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 232
3 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 65
4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 214
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.
The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e., following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level on the Control Dis-
play while driving or when stopped on a level
surface with the engine running.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If the engine oil has been topped off, the
measurement of the oil level can take up to
30 minutes.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!":
Add a maximum of 1 literUS quart/liter of
engine oil at the next opportunity, refer also
to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level
displayed is below minimum, add engine oil
immediately. Failure to do so may lead to
engine damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked.":
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to Service requirements on page 77. Have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corre-
sponding message is shown on the Control Dis-
play.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas
of skin with soap and water after such work.
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of children
and observe the warnings on the containers to
prevent health risks.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or
at a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Approved engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is
unavailable, you can add small quantities of
other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only
use oils of the specification API SM or higher.
Your BMW center will be happy to answer
detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.
The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the 0W-40,
0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30 SAE
classes.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Under the hood
214
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your
BMW center for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instruc-
tions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter-
clockwise to allow any accumulated pres-
sure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the cool-
ant level is between the MIN and MAX
marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level – do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The ultimate objective is to
ensure economical maintenance by providing
the ideal service for your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete center service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 77:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in remote control
Your vehicle stores the information required
maintenance continuously in the remote con-
trol during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehi-
cle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Ser-
vice Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 79, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Maintenance
216
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface
Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.
This socket is located on the driver's side on the
left under a cover.
Exhaust-gas values
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle emissions are raised. The
trip can be continued. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Display of the previously described
malfunction in Canadian models.
The lamp flashes under certain condi-
tions. This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the
engine. In this case you should reduce speed
and drive to the nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Heavy engine misfiring causes seri-
ous damage to the emission-relevant compo-
nents, especially the catalytic converter, within
a short time.
If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight-
ened, the OBD system will assume that
fuel vapor escapes. Then a display lights up. If
the cap is then tightened, the display will go out
within a few days.<
Data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also sub-
scribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can
be transmitted or recorded to enable corre-
sponding services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Car-care products
Regular cleaning and care make a significant
contribution to retaining your BMW's value.
For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW
recommends using only products that BMW
has approved for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be glad to advise you
about products and services for the cleaning
and care of your BMW.
Genuine BMW Care Products are materi-
als tested, laboratory tested, and tested in
actual use. They offer optimum care and pro-
tection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents; they can damage your vehi-
cle.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or pose health risks.
You should therefore heed the warnings and
hazard indications on the packaging. Open the
doors or windows on your vehicle whenever
cleaning the interior. Make sure there is suffi-
cient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only
products that are formulated for vehicle clean-
ing.<
Exterior care
Washing your vehicle
In the winter months, it is especially
important to ensure that the vehicle is
washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, signifi-
cant soiling and road salt can cause damage to
the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so
may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and
also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<
Car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes.
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the
following points:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 239.
> If necessary, fold in the outside rearview
mirrors, refer to page 51.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with rail heights over
4in/10cm, otherwise there is danger of
damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Deactivate rain sensor to prevent unwanted
wiper activation.
> Deactivate rear window wiper
*
and protect
it from damage. Take appropriate protec-
tive measures; inquiring with the car wash
operator as needed.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g., spoil-
ers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into the car wash, make sure the
vehicle is able to roll by making sure to:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Shift into transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or
temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or
can result in water penetration. Follow the oper-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Care
218
ating instructions for the high-pressure clean-
ing jets.<
When using high-pressure cleaning jets,
do not remain in one place for a long time
and be sure to maintain a distance of at least
12 in/30 cm from sensors, e.g., Park Distance
Control sensors or radar sensors.<
Hand washing
When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty
of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the
vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a
washing brush.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<
Follow local guidelines for washing vehi-
cles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or
strong solvents to clean the covers.
Loosen dirt, e.g., insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with plenty of
water.
Use a window de icer to remove accumulated
ice and snow, not a scraper.
Windows
Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and out-
side surfaces of the windows and the glass sur-
faces of the mirrors.
Do not use quartz-containing cleansers
to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<
Paintwork care
Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.
Regionally occurring environmental factors can
affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore
important to tailor the frequency and extent of
your car care accordingly.
Immediately remove particularly aggressive
substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease,
brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; other-
wise, they may damage your paint.
Repairing paint damage
Repair stone damage or scratches imme-
diately, depending on the severity of the
damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<
BMW recommends having paint damage pro-
fessionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish
materials in accordance with factory guidelines.
Waxing
Sealant is required when water no longer beads
on the clean surface of the paint. Use only prod-
ucts that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax
to seal your finish.
Rubber gaskets
Treat only with water or a rubber care product.
To avoid noise or damage, do not use
products that contain silicone to care for
rubber gaskets.<
Chrome components
Particularly after exposure to road salt, thor-
oughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door
handles, or window frames with plenty of water
with shampoo added to it. For additional treat-
ment, use chrome polish.
Alloy wheels
Depending on your system, braking can gener-
ate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels.
Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel
cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and
do not use steam cleaners at temperatures
greater than 140 °F/606, otherwise you may
damage your vehicle.<
Outside sensors
Sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such as
Park Distance Control sensors or radar sensors,
should be kept clean and free of ice to retain
their full function.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Interior care
Upholstery/fabrics
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order
to remove surface dirt.
In the event of more serious soiling such as bev-
erage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
microfiber cloth in combination with suitable
interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the
packaging.
Clean upholstery material over a large
area extending out to the seams. Avoid
intense friction.<
Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
items of clothing can cause damage to
the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro
fasteners are closed.<
Leather/leather coverings
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight patterns in the
grain are part of the typical properties of a natu-
ral leather.
Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and
folds and result in considerable wear and cause
the leather surface to become prematurely brit-
tle. We therefore suggest that you clean the
leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at
regular intervals.<
Particularly with light-colored leather, make
sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater
tendency to become soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year with a leather
lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective
layer of the leather.
Carpets/cargo bay
Carpeting, floor mats, and luggage compart-
ment rugs and paneling can be cleaned with a
vacuum or in the event of more serious soiling,
cleansed with an interior cleaner.
Floor mats and luggage compartment rugs can
be removed for cleaning. When inserting into
place, make sure that the seat rails do not pro-
trude over the floor mats; otherwise floor mats
can be damaged.
Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the produc-
tion process and can be removed by repeated
vacuuming.
Plastic components inside
Clean the glass cover of the instrument panel,
imitation leather surfaces, lamp lenses, and
matte components with water and, if necessary,
a solvent-free plastic cleaner.
Fine wooden components
Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim
panels and components. Follow up by drying
with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Inside sensors
Clean inside sensors such as those of the high-
beam assistant using a lint-free cloth moist-
ened with glass cleaner.
Displays
Clean displays like the radio or the Control Dis-
play using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft,
nonabrasive lint-free cloth.
Avoid using excessive pressure when
cleaning displays; otherwise, you could
damage them.<
Never use chemical-based cleansers or
household scouring products. Keep all
liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise
corrosion or damage to surfaces or electrical
components can occur.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use cleaning CDs; they can dam-
age parts of the player.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Care
220
Storing your vehicle
When storing your vehicle for longer than three
months, please seek the advice of your BMW
center or a workshop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Sedan
The Onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
luggage compartment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.
Sports Wagon
The Onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left
side panel of the cargo bay.
Wiper blade replacement
Front
1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp firmly.
2. Press the safety tabs together while sliding
the wiper blade toward the front to disen-
gage it.
3. Mount the new wiper blade and slide in until
it is heard to engage.
Rear*
1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW center perform any work that you do
not feel competent to perform yourself or that is
not described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
222
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<
A selection of replacement bulbs is available at
your BMW center.
Only replace bulbs when cool, as other-
wise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<
For information on how to care for the head-
lamps, please follow the instructions on
page 217.
For bulbs for which changing is not
described, and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<
Halogen headlamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
engine compartment.
1 Cover cap for low beams
2 Cover cap for high beams
To remove the cover caps:
> Low beams: press the detent, arrow, and
remove the cover from the guide.
> High beams: turn the cover cap to the left
and remove.
Always wear gloves and eye protection –
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise there is a danger of inju-
ries if the bulb is accidentally damaged during
replacement.<
Low beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Remove and replace the bulb.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
High beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Remove and replace the bulb.
Parking and roadside parking lamps
In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-
ingly trained personnel.
Xenon lamps*
The service life of these bulbs is very long and
the probability of a failure is very low, provided
that they are not switched on and off an unusual
number of times. If one of these bulbs should
nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv-
ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro-
vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit
this.
Have work on the xenon lighting system
performed only by your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<
Access to lamps
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
engine compartment.
1 Cover cap for parking and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
2 Sealing cap for turning lamps
*
To remove the covers:
> Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps,
daytime running lamps: turn the cover cap
to the left and remove.
> Turning lamps: turn the sealing cap to the
left and remove.
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lamps
H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Turn the bulb in the direction of the arrow, in
the opposite direction on the other side,
and remove.
2. Remove the connector and replace the
bulb.
Turning lamps*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
224
1. Remove the sealing cap, refer to Access to
lamps.
2. Push the locking bar to the side out of the
anchor and fold upward.
3. Remove the connector and take out the
bulb.
4. Replace the bulb and reinstall.
5. Fold down the locking bar and engage it.
6. Reconnect the connector.
7. Mount the sealing cap. Watch the markings
on the bulb when doing so.
Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Side-mounted turn signals
5-watt bulb, W5W
1. Press back against the front edge of the
lamp with the tip of your finger, then pivot it
out.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.
3. Remove the bulb for replacement.
Side marker lamps, front and rear
To replace, please go to your BMW center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained per-
sonnel.
Tail lamps
Sedan
> Turn signals 1, tail lamps 6 and side marker
lamps 7 are designed using LED technol-
ogy. In the event of a malfunction, please go
to your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
> Backup lamps: 16-watt bulb, W16W
> Other lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W
1 Turn signal
2 Tail lamp and brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
4 Brake lamp
5 Reflector
6 Tail lamp
7 Side marker lamp
Sports Wagon
> Turn signals 1, tail lamps 3 and side marker
lamps 7 are designed using LED technol-
ogy. In the event of a malfunction, please go
to your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.
> Backup lamps: 16-watt bulb, W16W
> Brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, P21W
1 Turn signal
2 Brake lamp
3 Tail lamp
4 Backup lamp
5 Brake lamp
6 Reflector
7 Side marker lamp
Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please go to your
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to BMW repair procedures with correspond-
ingly trained personnel.
Fender-mounted lamps
Sedan
The illustration shows the left-hand side of the
cargo bay.
All the bulbs are integrated into a central bulb
fitting.
1. Lift up floor mat.
2. Undo the quick-release fasteners of the
side panel and pull out the panel.
3. Turn the lock to the left and remove the bulb
holder.
4. Backup lamps:
Remove and replace the bulb.
Other lamps:
Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Sports Wagon
1. Right side: Unhook the retaining strap
*
,
refer to page 119.
2. Open the side panel.
3. Turn the bulb socket to the left and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
Lamps in luggage compartment lid
License plate lamp
5-watt bulb, C5W
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
226
1. Insert screwdriver into the slot and press to
the right, refer to arrows. This releases the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp and replace the bulb.
Sports Wagon:
Brake lamp and backup lamp
1. Turn the locks to the left and fold down the
trim.
2. Fold down the foam insulation.
3. Pull out the bulb holder for the backup
lamp 1 or brake lamp 2 downward.
4. Backup lamp: remove the bulb for replace-
ment.
Brake lamp: apply gentle pressure to the
bulb while turning it to the left for removal
and replacement.
Changing wheels
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the imme-
diate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle
*
or portable hazard warning
lamp
*
is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehi-
cle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regu-
lations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises later on, note the posi-
tions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after com-
pleting work.
1 Chock
*
2 Vehicle jack
*
3 Lug wrench
*
The tools are located in the mount under the
floor mat or floor panel flap.
1. Lift up floor mat or floor panel flap and cover
located beneath it.
2. Take out the required tools.
3. After using the tools, return them to the
storage space.
With run-flat tires, no tools are provided
for wheel changes. They can be pur-
chased as accessories at your BMW center.<
Sports Wagon: removing and installing
floor panel flap of storage area
1. Unhook the luggage compartment roller
cover at the rear.
2. Raise the floor panel flap.
3. Unhook the two catch straps at the top.
4. Unlock the gas spring strut, refer to arrow,
and remove.
5. Fold over the floor panel flap toward the
front to release it and remove.
6. Open the front floor panel flap.
7. Swing up the spare tire cover and hook the
hooks into the upper frame of the tailgate
opening.
8. Take out the cross support upward.
When installing the floor panel flap, proceed in
the reverse order and press down the hinge
covers.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
228
Compact wheel*
1. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
2. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
3. Take out the tool mounts 3.
4. Remove the compact wheel.
Preparing wheel change
1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Prevent the vehicle from rolling:
Place the chock behind the front wheel on
the other side of the vehicle, or on inclines,
in front of this wheel. On steeply inclined
roads, always secure the vehicle against
rolling.
3. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire sur-
face of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<
2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.
3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.
Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genu-
ine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.
After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tight-
ened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 88.5 lb ft/120 Nm.<
2. When stowing the wheel and tools in the
vehicle, execute these steps in the reverse
order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamina-
tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 89, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 90.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possi-
ble and have the new wheel/tire balanced.
Driving with compact wheel
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
The driving characteristics change, for example
reduced track stability on braking, extended
braking distance, and altered self-steering
characteristics in the limit range. In conjunction
with winter tires, these characteristics are more
pronounced.
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to
their original size as quickly as possible. Failure
to do so is a safety risk.<
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 232.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a recycling
center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi-
tion for transport and storage. Always restrain
the battery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
Following a temporary power failure, e.g., due to
a discharged battery, the use of some equip-
ment will be restricted, requiring its reinitializa-
tion. In the same way, individual settings are lost
and must be updated again:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 46.
> Time and date
Must be updated again, refer to page 78.
> Radio
In some cases, radio stations may have to
be stored again, refer to page 156.
> Navigation system
You must wait until the system becomes
functional again, refer to page 132.
> Glass roof, electric
It may only be possible to raise the glass
roof. The system must be initialized, refer to
page 40.
> Panorama glass roof
It may only be possible to raise the glass
roof. The system must be reinitialized, refer
to page 41.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deacti-
vated during this time, refer to page 92.
> xDrive
The system automatically initializes itself
during a trip. Indicator lamps light up during
this time. If the lamps do not disappear dur-
ing the current trip, have the system
checked.
> Power windows
The pinch prevention system for the power
windows must be reinitialized, refer to
page 38.
Talk to your BMW center before placing
the stored vehicle back in service.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Replacing components
230
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Sedan
Spare fuses, plastic tweezers and fuse alloca-
tion diagram are located in the compartment for
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 221.
Sports Wagon
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are
contained in the onboard tool kit, refer to
page 221. A fuse allocation diagram is located
in the cargo bay behind the right-hand side
panel.
In glove compartment
1. Release both quick-release fasteners.
2. Fold the cover forward or remove.
Sedan: in cargo bay
1. Lift up floor mat.
2. Release the quick-release fastener of the
right side panel and pull out the panel.
Sports Wagon: in cargo bay
1. Unhook the retaining strap
*
, refer to
page 119.
2. Open the right-hand side panel.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency request
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 194.
> Radio readiness is activated.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The BMW Assist system is functional.
> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency request
is still possible when no mobile phone is
paired with the vehicle.
Once your BMW Assist subscription expires,
the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by
a BMW center without you having to visit a
workshop. If the BMW Assist system has been
deactivated, Emergency Requests are not pos-
sible. The BMW Assist system can be reacti-
vated by a BMW center after signing a new con-
tract.
Initiating an emergency request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
When the Emergency Request is received at
the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Assist Response Center contacts you and
arranges for additional steps to help you. Even if
you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center can take further steps to help
you under certain circumstances.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
In the event of a BMW Assist emergency call,
data that are used to determine the necessary
rescue measures, such as the current position
of your vehicle if it can be established, are trans-
mitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you, though.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by pressing the but-
ton.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
232
Sedan
Loosen the wing nut to open.
Sports Wagon
Release the two quick-release fasteners and
fold down the trim piece.
First aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
Sedan
The first aid kit is located in the luggage com-
partment lid.
Loosen the wing nut to open.
Sports Wagon
The first aid kit is located in the right side panel
of the cargo bay. Before opening the side panel,
pull the retaining strap
*
toward the rear by its
rear end and unhook it.
Roadside Assistance*
Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group offers
you assistance in the event of a breakdown
around the clock, including on weekends and
public holidays.
The phone numbers of Roadside Assistance in
your home country can be found in the Contact
brochure.
With BMW Assist you can contact Roadside
Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in
the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive,
refer to page 192.
Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Care-
fully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and com-
ponents in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol-
low this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
In your BMW, the so-called jump-starting termi-
nal in the engine compartment serves as a pos-
itive terminal for the battery, also refer to engine
compartment overview on page 212. The cover
cap is marked with a +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump-
starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.
2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid-
ing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a start-
ing-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative terminal.
5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.
Starting engine
1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using tow fitting
Always keep the screw-in tow fitting with the
vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear
of the BMW.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
234
Sedan:
It is located in the toolkit in the luggage com-
partment lid, refer to page 221.
Sports Wagon:
It is located in the toolkit behind the left side
panel in the cargo bay, refer to page 221.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehi-
cle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<
Access to screw thread
Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the
bumper.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 57, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. Do not tow the
vehicle with the rear axle raised, as otherwise
the steering can turn to the left or right. When
the engine is stopped, there is no power assist.
This then requires increased effort for braking
and steering. Active steering is deactivated and
larger steering wheel movements are
required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend-
ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-
tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic and sport automatic
transmission
Before towing, manually release the
transmission lock, even if there is no mal-
function in the transmission. Otherwise there is
a risk that the transmission lock will engage dur-
ing towing.<
Manually unlocking and locking transmission
lock, refer to page 61.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar-
ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.
With tow bar
The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Mobility
235
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<
With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as
attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<
With tow truck
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
With a tow truck: xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised, otherwise the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported only on a flatbed
surface.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but
instead start the engine by means of jump start-
ing, refer to page 232. With a catalytic con-
verter, tow-starting should only be carried out
with the engine cold, and with automatic trans-
missions, the engine cannot be started by tow-
starting.
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,
comply with country-specific regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Tow-start with the clutch completely
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch again completely.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system and
an index that will help you find information
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technical data
238
Technical data
Engine data
528i 535i 550i
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 292.8/4,799
No. of cylinders 668
Maximum output hp 230 300 360
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 6,300
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407 360/488
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400-5,000 3,400
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
239
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Sedan
All dimensions are given in inches/mm.
Vehicle height with xDrive: 58.3 in/1,482 mm
Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.5 ft/11.4 m, with xDrive 39 ft/11.9 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technical data
240
Sports Wagon
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 39 ft/11.9 m
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
241
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Sedan 528i 535i 550i
Curb weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 3,505/1,590 3,660/1,660 3,946/1,790
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 3,571/1,620 3,703/1,680 3,968/1,800
Approved gross vehicle weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 4,607/2,090 4,872/2,210 5,048/2,290
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,673/2,120 4,872/2,210 5,070/2,300
Load lbs./kg 1,102/500 1,102/500 1,102/500
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,227/1,010 2,359/1,070 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,601/1,180 2,711/1,230 2,733/1,240
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 18.4/520 18.4/520 18.4/520
Sedan 528i xDrive 535i xDrive
Curb weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 3,670/1,710 3,902/1,770
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 3,704/1,730 3,946/1,790
Approved gross vehicle weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 4,839/2,195 5,004/2,270
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,883/2,215 5,048/2,290
Load lbs./kg 1,102/500 1,102/500
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,315/1,050 2,315/1,050
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,689/1,220 2,689/1,220
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 18.4/520 18.4/520
Sports Wagon 535i xDrive
Curb weight
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 4,100/1,860
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,144/1,880
Approved gross vehicle weight
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Technical data
242
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
> Manual transmission lbs./kg 5,291/2,400
> Automatic transmission lbs./kg 5,335/2,420
Load lbs./kg 1,190/540
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,381/1,080
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,866/1,300
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 17.7-58.3/500-1,650
Sports Wagon 535i xDrive
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel grade: page 201
of that reserve US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8
550i US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10
Window cleaning system For more details: page 65
> Sedan US quarts/liters approx. 3.2/3
> with headlamp cleaning system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5
> Sports Wagon US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
243
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands of voice activation
system
With short commands you can run certain func-
tions directly, regardless of which menu item is
selected. Here are the important short com-
mands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
*
Function Command
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Tone control {Tone}
Selecting the settings {Settings}
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
*
{Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
*
{Phonebook}
Opening BMW Assist
*
{B M W Assist}
Opening the home address
*
{Home address}
Opening destination entry
*
{Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
*
{Guidance}
Function Command
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D ... track ...} e.g., CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g., track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD {C D and D V D}
CD and DVD menu {C D and D V D}
Selecting a DVD {D V D …}
Entertainment details on the split screen {Entertainment details}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
244
Music collection
External devices
Tone control
Radio
FM
AM
Weather Band
Function Command
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening the music collection {Music collection}
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Calling up FM {F M}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Selecting a radio station {Station …} e.g., W-PLJ
Calling up a station {Select station} e.g., W-PLJ
Function Command
Calling up AM {A M}
Opening manual search {Manual search}
Function Command
Selecting the Weather Band {Weather band}
Switching on the Weather Band {Weather band on}
Selecting a Weather Band station {Select a weather channel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Satellite radio
Presets
Telephone
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Satellite radio channel} e.g., channel 2
Function Command
Calling up the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g., stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying the phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
246
Map
Split screen settings
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Perspective map}
Automatic scaling of the map
*
{Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Scale ... feet
*
{Map scale ... feet} e.g., map scale 100 feet
Scale ... meters
*
{Map scale ... meters} e.g., map scale
100 meters
Scale ... kilometers
*
{Map scale ... kilometers} e.g., map scale
5 kilometers
Scale ... miles
*
{Map scale ... miles} e.g., map scale 5 miles
Scale ... yards
*
{Map scale ... yards} e.g., map scale 100 yards
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen perspective {Split screen perspective}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Split screen scale ... feet
*
{Split screen scale ... feet}
e.g., split screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale ... meters
*
{Split screen scale ... meters}
e.g., split screen scale 100 meters
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contacts
BMW Assist
Vehicle information
Settings
Vehicle
Split screen scale ... kilometers
*
{Split screen scale ... kilometers}
e.g., split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale ... miles
*
{Split screen scale ... miles}
e.g., split screen scale 5 miles
Split screen scale ... yards
*
{Split screen scale ... yards}
e.g., split screen scale 100 yards
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Function Command
Function Command
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist {B M W Assist}
Opening BMW Search
*
{B M W Search}
Opening the Internet
*
{Internet}
Function Command
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Selecting the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Short commands of voice activation system
248
Equipment
Central screen settings {Control display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings {Limit}
Opening the light menu {Lighting}
Selecting the door lock {Door locks}
Function Command
Function Command
Selecting the air conditioning {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
250
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 85
– indicator lamp 87
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 66
Accessories 6
Accident, refer to Emergency
request 231
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 79
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 108
Activation times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 109
Active backrest width,
adjusting 45
Active cruise control 66
– indicator lamp 70
– radar sensors 70
– selecting distance 68
– warning lamps 70
Active front head restraints 47
Active seat 50
Active seat ventilation 50
Active steering 92
– warning lamp 93
Adapter for spare key 26
Adaptive brake assistant 85
Adaptive brake lamps, refer to
Brake force display 93
Adaptive Light Control 101
Additional connection of
music player in mobile
phone 172
Additives
– coolant 214
– engine oil, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
Address for navigation
– entering 133
Adjusting interior
temperature 106
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 152
Adjusting thigh support 44
Airbags 93
– indicator/warning lamp 95
– indicator lamp for front
passenger airbags 94
– sitting safely 43
Air distribution
– automatic 106
– manual 107
Airing, refer to Ventilation 108
Air recirculation
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 107
– recirculated-air mode 107
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 107
Air supply, automatic climate
control 105
Air volume 107
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 201
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off alarm 35
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
Albums of music
collection 169
Alloy wheels 218
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 209
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 86
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Altering stretch of road 143
Antenna for mobile phone 178
Antifreeze
– coolant 214
– washer fluid 65
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system, refer to
Central lokking system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 241
Approved engine oils 213
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 241
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest
– rear 116
Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time
– refer to Computer 76
Ashtray
– front 114
– rear 115
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 85
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 107
Audio 152
– controls 152
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 152
– volume 152
Audio device, external 113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic
– air distribution 106
– air volume 106
– cruise control 66
– garage door opener 110
– headlamp control 100
– recirculated-air control
AUC 107
– steering wheel
adjustment 45
– tailgate operation 34
Automatic climate control 105
– automatic air
distribution 106
– parked car ventilation 109
– settings via iDrive 108
– switching on and off 108
– ventilation in rear 108
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 31
Automatic curb monitor 51
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 100
– refer to Daytime running
lamps 101
– refer to Interior lamps 104
– refer to Pathway lighting 101
– refer to Welcome lamps 100
Automatic lights
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 102
Automatic low beams, refer to
High-beam Assistant 102
Automatic luggage
compartment roller cover,
Sports Wagon 117
Automatic Service
Request 196
Automatic soft closing 31
Automatic speed reduction for
descents, refer to HDC Hill
Descent Control 86
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– interlock 60
– kick down 60
– manually unlocking and
locking transmission lock 61
– shiftlock 60
– towing 234
– tow-starting 235
– with Comfort Access 37
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 106
AUX-IN port 172
Available services 196
Average fuel consumption 75
– setting units 76
Average speed, refer to
Computer 75
Avoiding freeways for
navigation 142
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 241
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Backrests, refer to Seats 44
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats, refer to Rear seats
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 224
Band-aids, refer to First aid
kit 232
Bass, refer to Tone
control 152
Battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 229
– jump starting 232
Battery replacement
– remote control for Comfort
Access 38
BC button, refer to
Computer 75
Being towed 234
Belts, refer to Safety belts 48
Beverage holder, refer to
Cupholders 114
Blower, refer to Air
volume 107
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 180
BMW
– Car Shampoo 219
BMW Assist,
activating 194, 196
BMW Assist 192
BMW homepage 4
BMW maintenance
system 215
BMW Night Vision 96
– activating 98
– cleaning camera 98
– cleaning camera, refer to
Wiper system 64
– deactivating 98
– making settings 98
BMW Search 194
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to
Cupholders 114
Bracket for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 188
Brake assistant 85
– adaptive 85
Brake force display 93
Brake lamps
– replacing bulbs 224
– two-stage 93
Brake rotors
– breaking-in 124
– refer to Braking safely 126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
252
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 85
– brake assistant 85
– brake force display 93
– breaking-in 124
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 85
– electronic brake-force
distribution 85
– parking brake 59
– refer to Braking safely 126
– warning lamps 13
Brake system 124
– brake pads 124
– breaking-in 124
– disk brakes 126
– warning lamp 87
Braking safely 126
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 232
Breaking-in brake pads 124
Breaking-in the clutch 124
Breaking-in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 124
Break-in period 124
Brightness of Control
Display 83
Button for starting engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 57
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
Call
– accepting 181
– ending 182
– rejecting 182
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 182
Can holder, refer to
Cupholders 114
Capacities 242
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 229
Care 217
– car-care products 217
– carpets 219
– car washes 217
– CD/DVD player 219
– chrome components 218
– displays 219
– exterior 217
– fine wooden
components 219
– hand washing 218
– headlamps 218
– high-pressure cleaning
jets 217
– interior 219
– leather 219
– light-alloy wheels 218
– paint 218
– plastic components 219
– rubber gaskets 218
– safety belts 219
– sensors and cameras 219
– upholstery and cloth-
covered paneling 219
– windows 218
Cargo
– refer to Cargo loading 126
– securing 128
– securing with ski bag 120
Cargo bay
– capacity 241
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually, Sports
Wagon 33
– emergency release 32
– expanding, Sports
Wagon 117
– floor panel flap, refer to
Compartment in floor,
Sports Wagon 118
– locking separately 31
– opening/closing, refer to
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from inside, Sports
Wagon 33
– opening from outside
31
– opening from outside,
Sports Wagon 33
– opening with remote
control 29
Cargo bay cover, refer to
Luggage compartment
roller cover 117
Caring for the vehicle
finish 218
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 112
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 178
Car radio, refer to Radio 155
Car Shampoo 219
Car wash 58
– with Comfort Access 37
Car washes 217
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 125
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 85
CBS Condition Based
Service 215
CD, audio playback 160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
253
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
CD changer 160, 164
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 162
– filling or emptying the
magazine 164
– random sequence 161
– selecting a track 160
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 152
– volume 152
CD player 160
– controls 152
– fast forward/reverse 162
– random sequence 161
– selecting a track 160
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 152
– volume 152
Center armrest
– front 112
– rear 116
Center brake lamp 225
Center console 14
Central locking
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Central locking system 27
– Comfort Access 36
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changes, technical, refer to
Parts and accessories 6
Changing language on
Control Display 82
Changing scale for
navigation 145
Changing trips 141
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 76
Changing wheels 208, 226
CHECK button 80
Check Control 79
Check Gas Cap 201
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 202
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 54
Child restraints 53
Child restraint systems 53
Child-safety lock 56
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 53
Chime, refer to Check
Control
79
Chock 227
Chrome-plated parts 219
Chrome polish 219
Cigarette lighter 114
Cigarette lighter socket, refer
to Connecting electrical
devices 115
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 217
Clock 74
– 12h/24h format 79
– setting time 78
– setting time and date 79
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Closing fuel filler cap 201
Clothes hooks 113
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Engine,
starting 58
Combination instrument, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Comfort Access 36
Comfort access
– observe in car wash 37
– replacing battery, remote
control 38
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Comfort seat 44
Compact wheel
– inflation pressure 203
– wheel change 228
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 57
Compartments
– in cargo bay, Sports
Wagon 118
– refer to Storage area loading
options, Sports Wagon 119
– refer to Storage
compartments 113
Computer 75
– displays on Control
Display 76
Concierge service 193
Condensation, refer to When
vehicle is parked 126
Condition Based Service
CBS 215
Confirmation signals for
locking and unlocking 29
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 115
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 75
Consumption indicator
– Energy Control 75
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 75
Contacts
– creating 190
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 83
– switching off/on 19
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Convenient opening and
closing
– glass sunroof 28
– windows 28
– windows and glass sunroof
with Comfort Access 37
Coolant 214
– checking level 214
– temperature 74
Cooling, maximum 107
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
254
Cooling function, automatic
climate control 107
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 214
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 85
Country codes DVD 162
Country of destination for
navigation 133
Courtesy lamps 104
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 112
Cruise control 65
– active cruise control 66
Cruising range 75
Cupholders 114
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 241
Current consumption, refer to
Energy Control 75
Current playback
– external devices 174
– of music collection 169
Customer Relations 195
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 238
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
Data, technical 238
– dimensions 239
– engine 238
– weights 241
Data transfer 196
Date 74
– date format 79
– retrieval 74
– setting 79
Daytime running lamps 101
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 200
– glass sunroof 40
– luggage compartment lid 32
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– tailgate 33
Defrosting windows 106
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 106
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 106
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 106
Deleting a trip 141
Destination address
– entering 133, 139
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 137
Destination for navigation
– entering via map 138
– entering via voice 139
– entry 133
Destination guidance 142
– bypassing route
sections 143
– changing specified
route 142
– continuing 142
– starting 142
– voice instructions 143
– volume of voice
instructions 144
Digital clock 74
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 156
Dimensions 239
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 63
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 143
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 143
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book
135
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 238
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display elements, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
Displays
– on Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-up Display 95
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with Comfort Access 38
– coolant 214
– vehicle battery 229
Distance, refer to
Computer 76
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 66
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 76
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 84
Divided rear backrest, refer to
Through-loading
system 116
Do 201
Door entry lighting 104
Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Door lock 30
Door locking, confirmation
signals 29
Doors
– manual operation 30
– remote control 28
DOT Quality Grades 207
Draft-free ventilation 108
Drinks holder, refer to
Cupholders 114
Drive-off assistant 87
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 100
Driving stability control
systems 85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving through water 126
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 124
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 107
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 107
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 85
– indicator lamp 13, 86
– malfunction 87
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 86
– activating 86
– indicator lamp 13, 86
DVD
– country codes 162
– settings 163
– video playback 162
DVD menu 163
DVD player, refer to CD
player 160
DVD video 162
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
– warning lamp 87
Dynamic destination
guidance 143
Dynamic Drive 88
Dynamic Driving Control 62
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 85
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 86
E
Easy entry/exit 52
– backrest width 45
Eject button, refer to Buttons
in area of CD/DVD
player 152
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 200
– glass sunroof, electric 40
– luggage compartment lid 32
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– tailgate 33
Electrical steering wheel
adjustment 52
Electronic brake-force
distribution 85
Electronic oil level check 212
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 200
– luggage compartment lid 32
– tailgate 33
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 61
Emergency operation, refer to
Moving manually
– glass sunroof 40
– panorama glass sunroof 41
Emergency release for
luggage compartment lid in
cargo bay 32
Emergency request 231
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 232
Energy-conscious driving,
refer to Energy Control 75
Energy Control 75
Engine
– breaking-in 124
– data 238
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 74
– speed 238
– starting 58
– starting, with Comfort
Access 36
– switching off 58
Engine compartment 212
Engine coolant 214
Engine oil
– adding 213
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
– approved engine oil 213
– checking oil level 212
– electronic oil level check 212
– interval between changes,
refer to Service
requirements
77
– oil change 213
– oil grades, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 238
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 238
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 58
Entering destination via town/
city name 133
Entering intersection,
navigation 134
Entering special destinations
by name 137
Entering the
address 133, 139
Entering zip code for
navigation 134
Entertainment sound output
on/off 152
Entry map for destination 138
Environmentally friendly
driving
– refer to Energy control 75
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 153
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 85
Event Data Recorders 216
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
256
Exterior mirrors 50
– adjusting 50
– automatic dimming
feature 52
– automatic heating 51
– folding in and out 51
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 51
External audio device 113
External devices
– random sequence 174
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 233
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 79
False alarm
– refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 36
– refer to Switching off
alarm 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 48
– warning lamp 48
Fastest route for
navigation 142
Fast forward
– CD changer 162
– CD player 162
Filler neck for washer fluid 65
Filter, refer to Microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter 108
First aid, refer to First aid
kit 232
First-aid kit 232
Flashing
– during locking/unlocking,
refer to Setting confirmation
signals 29
– triple turn signal
activation 63
Flat tire
– changing wheels 226
– compact wheel 228
– Flat Tire Monitor 88, 89
– refer to Tire condition 208
– run-flat tires 89, 91
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
– warning lamp 89, 91
Flat Tire Monitor 88
– false alarms 88
– initializing system 89
– snow chains 210
– system limits 88
– warning lamp 89
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 65
FM, waveband 155
Fog lamps 104
– indicator lamp 104
Folding rear backrest 116
– Sports Wagon 117
Folding rear backrest, Sports
Wagon 117
Folding rear seat backrest 116
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 126
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 104
For your own safety 5
4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive
86
Free memory capacity, music
collection 170
Freeway, refer to Route
criteria 142
Front airbags 93
Front armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 112
Front passenger airbags
– deactivating 94
Front seat adjustment 44
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 88
Fuel 201
– average consumption 75
– display 75
– high-quality brands 201
– quality 201
– refer to Average fuel
consumption 75
– specifications 201
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 242
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel consumption display
– computer, average fuel
consumption 75
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Fuel-efficient driving
– refer to Energy control 75
– refer to Saving fuel 124
Fuel filler flap 200
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 200
Fuses 230
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 110
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 201
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Gas station
recommendations 143
Gearshift lever
– manual transmission 59
General driving
notes 124, 125
Glass sunroof, electric 39
– Convenient opening and
closing from outside 30
– Convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 37
– moving manually 40
– remote control 28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
257
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Glove compartment 112
– lighting 112
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 132
Grills, refer to Ventilation 108
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 241
H
Halogen lamps 222
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hand washing 218
Hazard warning flashers 15
HDC Hill Descent Control 86
HD Radio 156
Head airbags 93
Headlamp
– cleaning tank, refer to
Capacities 242
Headlamp control,
automatic 100
Headlamp flasher 63
Headlamps 100
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 63
– filler neck for washer
fluid 212
– replacing bulbs 222
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 101
Head restraints 46
– active front head
restraints 47
– removing 47
– sitting safely 43
Head-up Display 95
Heated
– mirrors 51
– rear window 106
– seats 49
– steering wheel 52
Heating 105
– exterior mirrors 51
– interior 105
– rear window 106
– residual heat 107
– seats 49
– steering wheel 52
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 107
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 128
Height, refer to
Dimensions 239
Height adjustment
– seats 44
– steering wheel 52
High-beam Assistant 102
High beams 102
– headlamp flasher 102
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 223
High-pressure cleaning
jets 217, 218
High water, refer to Driving
through water 126
Hill Descent Control HDC 86
Hills 126
Holder for cups 114
Homepage of BMW 4
Hood 211
Hooks for shopping bags,
Sports Wagon 119
Horn 10
Hotel function, refer to
Locking separately 31
Hot exhaust system 125
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 85
Hydroplaning 125
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 156
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 74
Identification mark
– recommended tire
brands 209
– tire coding 206
iDrive 16
– automatic climate
control 108
– automatic climate control
with expanded scope 106
– changing language 82
– changing settings 82
– changing units of measure
and display type 76
– controller 16
– controls 16
– menu guidance 17
– setting brightness 83
– setting the date and time 79
– start menu 17
– status information 19
Ignition 57
– switched off 58
– switched on 57
Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 57
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 57
Ignition lock 57
– starting engine with Comfort
Access 37
Impressum 2
Imprint 2
Indicator/warning lamps
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 87
– active steering 93
– airbags 95
– brake system 87
– DSC 13, 86
– DTC 13, 86
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– safety belt warning 48
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 91
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
258
Indicator lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 104
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 202
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
– radio, refer to Storing
stations 156
– refer to Power failure 229
– refer to Setting time and
date 79
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Installation location
– mobile phone 112
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 143
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 104
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 110
Interactive map 138
Interior lamps 104
– switching on with remote
control 28
Interior motion sensor 36
– switching off 36
Interior rearview mirror 51
– automatic dimming
feature 52
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 64
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 172
iPod, connecting, refer to USB
audio interface 172
J
Jacking points 228
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 232
Jump starting 232
K
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Keys 26
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– spare key 26
Kick down, Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
Knock control 201
L
Lamps
– refer to High-beam
Assistant 102
Lamps and bulbs 221
Lane demarcation lines, refer
to Lane Departure
Warning 99
Lane Departure Warning 99
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 128
Last destinations 136
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 54
Leather care 219
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 222
Length, refer to
Dimensions 239
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 225
Light
– refer to Parking lamps/low
beams 100
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 222
Lighter 114
Lighting
– instruments 104
– lamps and bulbs 221
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 100
Light switch 100
Loading
– securing cargo 128
– stowing cargo 127
– vehicle 126
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 128
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Lokking 31
Locking 28
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 31
– from outside 28
– without key, refer to Comfort
Access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
Low beams 100
– automatic 100
– replacing bulbs 222
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Lug bolts 228
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 228
– wrench 227
Luggage compartment, refer
to Cargo bay
Luggage compartment lid 31
– emergency operation, refer
to Manual operation
32
– emergency release 32
– locking separately 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– unlocking and locking from
inside 30
– unlocking manually 32
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
– Comfort Access 37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Luggage compartment roller
cover, Sports Wagon 117
Luggage net, refer to Partition
net 118
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 128
Lumbar support 45
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 209
Maintenance 215
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 215
– refer to Service
requirements 77
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 215
Maintenance system 215
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 79
Managing music 170
Manual air distribution 107
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 200
– glass sunroof 40
– luggage compartment lid 32
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 61
Manual transmission 59
Map for navigation
– changing scale 145
– destination entry 138
Map view 144
Map view facing north 144
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Maximum cooling 107
Maximum speed
– with compact wheel 229
Maximum speed with winter
tires 209
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 239
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 184
Messages from the Concierge
service 185
Microfilter 108
Microphone
– for telephone 14
– for voice activation
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 52
Mirrors 50
– automatic curb monitor 51
– folding in and out 51
– heating 51
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 181
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing
178
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 112
– operation via iDrive 181
– pairing 178
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 178
Mobile phone battery 189
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring pressure of tires,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port 172
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB audio interface 172
Multi-channel playback 153
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 63
– refer to Wiper system 63
Music, playing 168
Music collection 167
– backup 171
– deleting 171
– random sequence 170
– restoring 171
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 172
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB audio
interface 172
Music search 168
MW, waveband 155
My Info 185
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 135
– storing current position 135
– voice activation 139
Navigation data 132
Navigation destination
– entering manually 133
– home address 136
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
260
Navigation system 132
– address book 135
– bypassing route
sections 143
– continuing destination
guidance 142
– destination entry 133
– dynamic destination
guidance 143
– entering a destination
manually 133
– entering destination via
voice 139
– frequently asked
questions 148
– gas station
recommendations 143
– planning a trip 140
– route list 143
– selecting destination via
map 138
– selecting route criteria 142
– special destinations 136
– starting destination
guidance 142
– terminating destination
guidance 142
– traffic bulletins 145
– voice instructions 143
– volume adjustment 144
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 46
New remote control 26
New wheels and tires 208
Night Vision, refer to
BMW Night Vision 96
Night vision device, refer to
BMW Night Vision 96
Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 64
Nylon rope, refer to Tow-
starting and towing 233
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnostics
interface 216
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 201
Odometer 74
Oil, refer to Engine oil 212
Oil change intervals
– refer to Service
requirements 77
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 221
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 36
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– using remote control 28
– using the door lock 30
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 238
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 107
Outside temperature
display 74, 75
– changing units of
measure 76
– in computer 76
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 74
Overview
– radio control 152
P
Panic mode 28
Panorama glass sunroof 40
– moving manually 41
Park Distance Control PDC 84
Parked car ventilation 109
– preselecting activation
times 109
– switching on and off
directly 109
Parked car ventilation system
– LED 105
Parking 13
– vehicle 58
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 84
Parking assistant, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 84
Parking brake 59
– indicator lamp 13, 59
Parking brake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Parking lamps 100
– replacing bulbs 223
Partition net, Sports
Wagon 118
Parts and accessories 6
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 51
Pathway lighting 101
PDC Park Distance Control 84
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 181
Phone numbers
– dialing 182
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 39
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– power windows 38
Placing a call
– refer to telephone owner's
manual
Plasters, refer to First aid
kit 232
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 57
Polish 219
Pollen, refer to Microfilter/
activated charcoal filter 108
Power failure 229
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
Preselecting activation times
of the parked car
ventilation 109
Pressure, tires 202
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
261
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 39
– panorama glass sunroof 41
– windows 38
R
Radio
– controls 152
– HD Radio 156
– satellite radio 158
– selecting waveband 155
– storing stations 156
– switching on/off 152
– tone control 152
– volume 152
– Weather Band, refer to
Weather news flashes 157
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 57
Radio readiness 57
– switched off 58
– switched on 57
– with Comfort Access 37
Rain sensor 64
Random sequence
– external devices 174
– music collection 170
Reading lamps 104
Rear armrest, refer to Center
armrest, rear 116
Rear fog lamps
– indicator lamp 13
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 224
– replacing bulbs 224
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 47
– folding over backrest 116
– heating 50
– removing head restraints 47
Rear socket 116
Rear ventilation 108
Rearview mirror 50
Rear window
– changing wiper blade 221
– heating 106
– opening and closing on
Sports Wagon 32
– roller sun blinds, refer to Sun
blinds 111
– wiper on Sports Wagon 64
Rear window safety switch 39
Reception
– quality 156
– radio stations 156
Recirculated-air mode 107
– air recirculation 107
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 107
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 44
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 224
Refueling
200
Releasing
– hood 211
Releasing the locks, refer to
Unlocking 36
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 75
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 76
Remote control 26
– Comfort Access 36
– garage door opener 110
– luggage compartment lid 29
– malfunction 29, 37
– replacing battery 38
– tailgate 29
Removing condensation on
the windows 106
Replacement fuses 230
Replacement of tires
– refer to Changing
wheels 226
Replacement remote control,
refer to New remote
controls 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 221
Replacing tires 209
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 208
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve
– warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 75
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 154
Residual heat 107
Restraint systems
– for children 53
– refer to Safety belts 48
Retaining straps, refer to
Storage area loading
options, Sports Wagon 119
Retreaded tires 209
Reverse
– CD changer 162
– CD player 162
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 59
Road map 144
Roadside
Assistance 193, 232
Roadside parking lamps 102
– replacing bulbs 223
Roller blind
– refer to Sun blinds 111
Roller cover
– refer to Luggage
compartment roller cover,
Sports Wagon 117
Roof load capacity 241
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
128
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 233
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 142, 143
– bypassing sections 143
– changing 142, 143
– changing criteria 142
– displaying map view 144
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 143
– selecting 142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
262
Route information, refer to
Destination guidance with
voice instructions 143
Route map, refer to Displaying
map view 144
Route selection 142
Run-flat tires
– continuing driving with
damaged tire 89, 91
– flat tire 89, 91
– Flat Tire Monitor 88
– inflation pressure 89
– tire inflation pressure 202
– Tire Pressure Monitor 90
S
Safety 5
Safety belts 48
– damage 48
– sitting safely 43
– warning lamp 48
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 93
– refer to Safety belts 48
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 85
– airbags 93
– driving stability control
systems 85
– safety belts 48
Satellite radio 158
– enabling or disabling
channel 158
– selecting channel 159
– storing channel 159
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 234
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 158
Seats 44
– active backrest width
adjustment 45
– adjusting the seats 44
– comfort seat 44
– easy entry/exit 45
– heating 49
– lumbar support 45
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
– shoulder support 44
– sitting safely 43
– storing the setting 45
– thigh support 44
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation 50
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 128
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 120
Selecting a detour 147
Selecting distance with active
cruise control 68
Selecting route 142
Selection options with
navigation system 142
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59, 60
Selector lever lock, refer to
Selecting transmission
positions 60
Self-leveling suspension 88
Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic
– towing 234
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 232
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 215
Service Interval Display
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 215
– refer to Service
requirements 77
Service Request 195
Service requirements 77
– refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 215
Services status 196
Setting button, refer to
Controls, controller 16
Settings
– BMW Night Vision 98
– changing on Control
Display 82
– clock, 12h/24h mode 79
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– DVD 163
– language 82
Settings for the map view 145
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 109
Shifting gears, Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Shift paddles on steering
wheel 62
Short commands for the voice
activation system 243
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 142
Shoulder support 44
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 161
– CD player 161
Side airbags 93
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 224
Side-mounted turn signals,
replacing bulbs 224
Side window blinds, refer to
Sun blinds 111
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 43
– with airbags 43
– with head restraint 43
– with safety belts 43
Ski bag 119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
263
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Electric glass
sunroof 39
– refer to Panorama glass
sunroof 40
Slope assistant, refer to Drive-
off assistant 87
Snap-in adapter
– mounting/removing 188
– using 178
Snow chains 210
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 216
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 57
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 115
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 31
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 231
Spare
– adapter for spare key 26
– fuses 230
– key 26
– wheel, refer to Compact
wheel 228
Spare wheel, refer to
Changing wheels 226
Special destinations 136
Special destinations,
displaying 138
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 213
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 213
Speed
– limit 81
– with compact wheel 229
Speed dial, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 81
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 153
Speed with winter tires 209
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 20
Sport automatic
transmission 62
– Dynamic Driving Control 62
– kick down 60
– towing 234
– with Comfort Access 37
Sport program, Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Sports Wagon
– automatic luggage
compartment roller
cover 117
– automatic tailgate
operation 34
– compartments in cargo
bay 118
– expanding cargo bay 117
– luggage compartment roller
cover 117
– luggage compartment roller
cover for cargo bay 117
– opening rear window 32
– opening tailgate 33
– panorama glass sunroof 40
– partition net 118
– rear window wiper 64
– rear window wiper, changing
wiper blade 221
– releasing fuel filler flap in
event of electrical
malfunction 200
– self-leveling suspension 88
– socket in cargo bay 115
– storage area loading
options 119
– tail lamps, replacing
bulbs 225
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 85
Start/Stop button 57
– starting the engine 58
– switching off the engine 58
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 58
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 232
Starting difficulties, refer to
Jump starting 232
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Drive-off assistant 87
Start menu 17
Station, refer to Radio 155
Station, selecting
– radio 155
Stationary ventilation
– preselecting activation
times 109
Status information on Control
Display 19
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam cleaners 217, 218
Steering wheel
– adjustment 52
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 45
– easy entry/exit 52
– heating 52
– lock, refer to Ignition lock 57
– memory 45
– shift paddles 62
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 92
Steptronic
– refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 59
– refer to Sport automatic
transmission 62
– refer to Sport program and
manual mode 61
Storage area loading options,
Sports Wagon 119
Storage compartments 113
Stored trip, calling up 141
Storing 220
Storing a destination in the
address book 135
Storing a trip 140
Storing music 167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
264
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Storing tires 209
Storing your vehicle 220
Street, entering,
navigation 134
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 202
Sun blinds 111
Surround 153
SVCD 162
SW, waveband 155
Swinging up floor panel,
Sports Wagon 118
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching automatically
between high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam Assistant 102
Switching off
– engine 58
Switching on
– audio 152
– CD changer 152
– CD player 152
– radio 152
Swiveling
– headlamps, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 101
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
T
Tachometer 74
Tailgate 31
– automatic operation 34
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33
– locking and unlocking from
inside 30
– opening from inside 33
Tail lamps 224
– replacing bulbs 224
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 242
Target cursor for
navigation 138
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 238
– capacities 242
– dimensions 239
Telephone 178
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 112
– voice commands 185
TeleService 192
TeleService Diagnosis 194
TeleService Help 194
Temperature
– adjusting in upper body
region 108
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 106
– changing unit of measure 76
– refer to Coolant
temperature 74
Temperature display
– outside temperature 74
– outside temperature
warning 74
– setting the units 76
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 65
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 225
Through-loading system 116
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 228
Tilt alarm sensor 36
– switching off 36
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 51
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 109
Tire inflation pressures 202
Tire pressure
– loss 89, 90
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Tire Quality Grading
207
Tire replacement
– new wheels and tires 208
Tires
– age 207
– air loss 89, 91
– breaking-in 124
– changing 208
– condition 208
– damage 208
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 226
– inflation pressure 202
– new wheels and tires 208
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 88
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
– replacing 226
– retreaded tires 209
– size 206
– tread 208
– wear indicators 208
– wheel/tire combination 208
– winter tires 209
Tires, run-flat
– continuing driving with
damaged tire 89, 91
– flat tire 91
– inflation pressure 91
– new tires 208
– new wheels and tires 208
Tire trouble
– changing wheels 226
– compact wheel 228
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 145
Tone
– control 152
– middle setting 154
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 221
Top 50 of music
collection 169
Torque
– refer to Engine data 238
Torque, lug bolts, refer to
After mounting 228
Tow bar 234
Tow fitting 233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Reference
265
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Towing 233
– methods 234
– tow fittings 233
– with automatic and sport
automatic transmission 234
– with manual
transmission 234
– with Sequential Manual
Transmission with
Drivelogic 234
Town/city, for navigation 133
Tow rope 235
Tow-starting 233
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
– resetting system 90
– system limits 90
– warning lamp 91
Tracks
– selecting with CD 160
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 85
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 85
Traffic bulletins
– categories 147
Traffic bulletins, filtering 147
Traffic information for
navigation
– depiction in route map 147
– during destination
guidance 147
Traffic information with
navigation 145
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
information 145
– refer to Bypassing route
sections 143
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– drive-off assistant 87
– manually unlocking and
locking transmission lock 61
– manual transmission 59
– sport automatic
transmission 62
– towing 234
Transporting children
safely 53
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 128
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 208
Trip-distance counter
– refer to Trip meter 74
Trip meter 74
Trip odometer, refer to Trip
meter 74
Trunk, refer to Cargo bay
Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 33
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions
239
Turning lamps 101
– replacing bulbs 223
Turn signals 63
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 224
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 207
Units
– average consumption 76
– temperature 76
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 110
Universal remote control 110
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 28
– setting unlocking
behavior 28
– without key, refer to Comfort
Access 36
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort Access 36
Updating the navigation
data 132
USB audio interface 172
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 229
– refer to Replacing battery 38
Using turn signals 63
V
Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 228
VCD 162
Vehicle
– battery 229
– breaking-in 124
– loading 126
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 239
– parking 58
– weights 241
Vehicle care, refer to Care 217
Vehicle jack 227
– jacking points 228
Ventilation 108
– draft-free 108
– in rear 108
– while stationary 109
Venting
– refer to Ventilation 108
Vent outlets 105
– refer to Ventilation 108
Vent outlets, automatic
climate control 105
Vents, automatic climate
control 105
Vents, refer to Ventilation 108
Video menu 163
Video playback 162
Viscosity 213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
266
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance with voice
instructions 143
Voice activation system
– overview 22
– short commands 243
Voice commands
– telephone 185
Voice instructions for
navigation system 143
– repeating 144
– switching on/off 143
– volume 144
Voice phone book 187
Volume 152
– audio sources 152
– cargo bay 241
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 242
– mobile phone 181
– voice instructions 144
– windshield cleaning system,
refer to Capacities 242
Volume balance, tone
setting 153
W
Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 79
Warning on leaving lane, refer
to Lane Departure
Warning 99
Warning triangle 231
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 215
Washer fluid 65
– capacity of the reservoir 65
Waste container, refer to
Ashtray 114
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 126
Water penetration 217, 218
Waveband for radio 155
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 208
Weather news flashes 157
Website BMW 4
Weights 241
Welcome lamps 100
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 208
Wheel/tire damage 208
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 239
Wheels and tires 202
Width, refer to
Dimensions 239
Windows 38
– Convenient opening and
closing 28
– Convenient opening and
closing from outside 30
– Convenient opening and
closingwith Comfort
Access 37
– rear window, Sports
Wagon 32
– safety switch 39
Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Wiper
system 63
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 106
– displays, refer to Head-up
Display 95
Windshield wash
– automatic, refer to Rain
sensor 64
– capacities, reservoir 242
– filler neck for washer
fluid 212
– rear window 64
– washer fluid 65
– windshield washer
nozzles 64
– wiper system 63
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 63
– wiper blade
replacement 221
Winter tires 209
– setting speed limit 81
– storage 209
Wiper blades
– replacement 221
Wiper system 63
– rain sensor 64
– washer fluid 65
– windshield washer
nozzles 64
Word matching principle for
navigation 141
Working in the engine
compartment 211
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard vehicle tool
kit 221
X
xDrive 86
Xenon lamps 223
– replacing bulbs 223
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
01 41 2 602 678 Ue
*BL2602678009*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AGOnline Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 678 - © 08/09 BMW AG
